it Xercast and Xerkest that is to say milke of trees for it is the dew y t falleth vpon the trées and remayneth hanging vpon the leaues like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises It is also gathered and kept in glasse Vials and so brought into India and other Countries for in India they vse it much in all sorts of purgations There is another sorte of Manna called Tiriamiabiin or Trumgibiin which they gather froÌ„ other leaues and hearbes that commeth in small peeces as big as Hempeséed and somewhat bigger which is red of a reddish colour Some thinke this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trées as Gumme doth it is much vsed in Ormus and Persia for purgations but not in India so much as the first sort there is yet another sorte which commeth in great peeces with the leaues among it it is like the Manna of Calabria this is brought out of Persia vnto Bassora and so to Ormus and from thence into India and is the dearest of all the rest There commeth also a Manna that is brought in leather bags or flasks which in Turkey and Persia they vse to ride withall is melted like Hony but of a white colour and in taste like the other sortes of Manna being altogether vsed for purgations and other medicines Manna very gently purgeth the gall it easeth and moystneth the harshnes of the throat the breastes and the stomacke it quencheth the thirst but because it purgeth but weakely it is strengthened with Tyme or Isop mingled with some strong purgations maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and power by meanes of the sweetnesse thereof which is apter and more plyable vnto nature But because it is no special marchandise I will speake no more thereof but for that wee are nowe in hande with medicines to purge I wil say some thing of the roote called Rhubaâ—be although there is no certaintie how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certaine y t it is not to be found in any couÌ„try but in China and in the farthest parts therof it is most brought by land through the Prouince of Vsbeke whereof I spake before which Prouince lyeth in Tartaria and bordereth on the one side vpon China and so reacheth behinde India vnto Persia Out of this Prouince it cometh vnto Ormus and from thence into India yet it is likewise brought by water but because it is not so good and doth sooner rot and spoyle by water then by land therefore most part of it is brought by land That which is most esteemed best sold and greatliest desired cometh in this manner that is first from China through Vsbeke and so through Turkie from whence it is caryed to Venice from thence into all these countries so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better because it cometh ouer land then that which is brought into Portingall because it cometh by water as also all thinges and herbes that belong to Physicke because they are better preserued by land then by water they are little brought by sea but it is a marchandise that is most caryed by land vnto Venice as also because the Portingales deale not much therein and are little giuen to curiosities conteÌ„ting themselues to deale with such wares as are commonlie knowne to all men without seeking further for they trouble not themselues with other things The 74. Chapter Of the wood called Sanders THere are 3. sorts of Sanders that is white yelow and red the white and the yealow which is the best come most out of the IlaÌ„d of Tymor which lyeth by Iaua This Iland hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders both of white and yealow and froÌ„ theÌ„ce it is caryed throughout all India and other couÌ„tries and trafficke much therewith the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Choramandel and Tanassariin which is in the countrie of Pegu the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and haue a certaine fruite vpon them like Cheries at the first green and after black but of no taste nor any thing worth for it presently falleth off onlie y e wood of y e trée is accounted of which is the SaÌ„ders It is called by the Inhabitants of the countrie where it groweth Chandanacon the Decannus Gusurates Canariins and other Indians cal it Sercandaa the Arabians and Persians Sandal wherevpon the Portingalles likewise doe call it Sandalo The yellow and white Sanders is much vsed and spent ouer all India by all the inhabitantes both Indians Moors Heathens and Iewes whatsoeuer they beate it or stampe it in water till it be as soft as pappe that done they besmere themselues therewith and let it drie vpon their bodies for it cooleth very much also because all the Indians doe much delight in sweet smelling sauours The white yellow or bleakish Sanders is likewise vsed by vs with Rose-water against the hotte paines in the head annointing it therewith all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow are good against hotte feauers being beaten and drunken into the body they help the hot stomacke as also laid vpon the stomacke with Rose water in burning feauers This Sanders is not onely good for the purposes aforesaid but also for strengthening the hart and therefore with great vse it is put into Cordiall medicines such as are made against the beating of the hart The red Sanders is little spent in India but they vse it onely against hot agues annointing their pulses therewith as also the temples their foreheads but it is much â—ryed into other countries as being very medicinable for many thinges and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idoles thereof because they should be the costlier The â—5 Chapter Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood SNakewood is most in the Island of Seylon it is a lowe Trée the roote thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white shewing somewhat yellowe very harde and bitter in taste it is much vsed in India they stampe and bruse it like Sanders in water or Wine and so drinke it it is very good well proued against all burning feauers one ounce thereof bruised and mixed with water is good against all poison and sicknes as the collick worms and all filthie humors and coldnes in the body and specially against the stinging of Snakes whereof it hath the name it was first found by means of a little beast called Qâ—il or Quirpele which is of bignesse very like a Ferret wherewith in those Countries they vse to driue Cunnies out of their holes and so ketch them whereof in India they haue many in their houses which they play withall to passe the time away as also to kill their Myce and Rattes and to driue them away This beast by nature is a great enemie to the Snake so that wheresoeuer she findeth any she fighteth with them and because it is often bitten by the Snake it knoweth how to heale it selfe with
twelue Italian miles and from thence the coast runneth south wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point there is a great intercourse or creeke of water hauing very good harber for shippes to anker in it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line from thence you perceiue 2. Islands both called Islas de Lobos that is Islandes of Sea Wolues because of the great quantity that are thereabouts the first of these Islands lyeth north and south with the first poynt and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles or 12. Italian miles the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward and is not ful vnder seuen degrees southwest from the coast till you come to the hauen called Câ—sma and from this first Island you saile northeast southwest to Malabrigo which is the slender or bad defence where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter but with faire weather and such specially as haue great occasion thereby to further their voyage Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarrâ—eâ—sse that is the cliffe of Truxilio which is a verie bad hauen and hath no other harber or defence then onely good ankers and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio which is also one of the Spanish townes situate in the plaine countrie of Peru it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull abounding in wheat Mâ—lâ— cattell and water and the towne built in good proportion hauing about three hundred Spanish houses with broade streetes and a great market place rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens and euerie house is serued with water by channels comming out of the Riuer and runneth into all their gardens which are continually greene and full of blossomes wherfore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes corne fieldes and Pastour groundes where the inhabitants feede their Cattell and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plaÌ„ted many kinds of spanish fruites as porâ—gaâ—nats oranges lemones citrons figs much of the countrie fruit in great aboundance and verie good besides this they haue many foules hens and capons whereby they are prouided of all things of flesh in great aboundance and fish out of the sea which is hard by them also in the riuer The Indians inhabiting about the towne are in subiection to the Spaniards and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen made by the Indians to sell in other places This towne was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto the first gouernour of Peru in the yeare 1533 From Truâ— by land vnto saint Michaeâ— another spanish towne and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes are about fiue and fortie spanish miles or an hundred and eightie Italian miles litle more or lesse for that comming from Saint Michaeâ—s to the vallie Motupâ— are fifteene miles and a halfe all sandie and bad way specially where men much cheefely trauell and being past those fifteene miles you enter into certaine vallies and though therabouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles yet they reach not to the vallies but runne into the sands whereby they doo no good and to trauaile this way you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening and so go all night and earlie in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt some carrie bottles with water or wine and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway very broad euen which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru I will declare more at large This vallie is broade and fruitfull but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish there groweth many trees the people draw their waterout of certaine pits which they dig within the earth their traffike is cotten wool and cloth made thereof three miles from Motupe lyeth the faire fresh vallie of Xaâ—anca which is also three miles great through the which there â—unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds this vallie in time past was very populous and likewise the other in this vallie were many houses of great Lords that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people from this vallie you goe to another called â—uqueme which likewise is great and full of bushes the ruines of the great houses that stood therin yet to bée séene do euidently shew that many people haue inhabited in that vallie a dayes iourney further there is yet another faire vallie called â—â—nto and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes and drie stony hils where you findâ— neither liuing creatures trees nor leaues but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it and such as will passe that way must haue good guides lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes and by reason of the great heate of the sun and want of water should faint for thirst From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name this vally likewise in times past was full of people but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres they are almost consumed from whence you goe to Zana much like the â—ormer and somewhat further to Palcamayo of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous the people of this vallie before they were ouercome and subdued by the â—ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours they had great churches wherein they sacrificed but now al destroyed and ouerthrowne there were likewise many Indians graues Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer that watereth al their groundes and through it also passeth the kings high way and therein were many houses belonging to the king In this vallie they make much cotten work haue al kind of cattel as kine hogs goates and such like beasts and is verie temperate From this vallie you go to another called Cancama not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers made by Dom di S. Themafe and three miles from thence in the vallie of Câ—â—â—o lieth Tâ—uxâ—lâ— as I said before which valâ—â—e keepeth the name of a Lorde called Câ—â—o who was a valiant Souldiour and liued long time 〈◊〉 warres The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure and through it also passeth the kings high way
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
in all India and the principall enemies that the Portingalles haue and which trouble them continually But the better to know the situation of the countrey you must vnderstande that all the coast seuered from India is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles vpon the coast which is that whereof we speake and is called Cuncam and then there is a high or hilly Countrey which reacheth almost vnto the skies and stretcheth from the one ende vnto the other beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin and the vttermost corner of India and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel This high land on the top is very flatte and good to build vpon called Ballagatte and Decan and is inhabited and diuided among diuers Kings and gouernors The inhabitants and natural borne countrimen are commonly called Decaniins and Canaras as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shal be particularly shewed with the shapes fashions and counterfeites of their bodies Churches houses trées Plantes and fruites c. The 11. Chapter Of the coast of India that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin and the furthest corner of the lande which is called the coast of Malabar THe coast of Malabar beginneth from Cape de Ramos which lyeth frō Goa Southwardes ten myles and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin in time past called Corii which is 100. and 7. or 8. miles whereon lie the places hereafter following which are inhabited by the Portingals and kept with fortresses first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortresse of Onor are tenne miles lying full vnder 14. degrées and is inhabited by the Portingalles There is great quantity of Pepper for that they are able euery yeare to lade a shippe with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper Portingal waight it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India This land belongeth to a Quéene named Batycola which is a towne not farre from thence inwardes wherin she kéepeth her Court it is she that selleth the Pepper and deliuereth it vnto the Marchantes Factors that lie in Onor but they must alwaies deliuer their money sixe monthes before they receyue their Pepper otherwise they get it not then she deliuereth the Pepper which by one of the Factors is receyued and laid vp within the fortresse till the shippes of Portingall come thether to take in their lading of Pepper There is likewise much Ryce This fortresse is not much frequented but onely in the time of lading of their Pepper which within fewe yeares hath béene vsed to be laden there for before they vsed not to lade any in that place From Onor to the towne of Barselor are 15. miles and lyeth vnder 13. degrées it is also inhabited by Portingalles as Onor is there is great store of Ryce Pepper from Barselo◠to Mangalor are 9. miles and lyeth vnder twelue degrées and a halfe which also is a fortresse inhabited as the others are by Portingals and hath great store of Pepper and Ryce From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. myles which lyeth right vnder 11. degrées and a halfe This is the best fortresse that the Portingalles haue in all Malabar and there is much Pepper The Malabars without the fortresse haue a village with many houses therein built after their manner wherein there is a market holden euery day in the which all kindes of victuailes are to be had which is wonderfull altogether like the Hollanders markets There you find Hennes Egges Butter Hony Indian Oyle and Indian figges that are brought from Cananor which are very great and without exception the best in all India of the which sorts of victuailes with other such like they haue great quantities also very faire and long mastes for shippes such as better cannot be found in all Norway and that in so great numbers that they furnish all the countries rounde about them It is a very gréene and pleasant lande to beholde full of faire high trées and fruitfull of all thinges so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore Among these Malabars the white Mores do inhabite that beléeue in Mahomet and their greatest traffique is vnto the redde sea although they may not doe it neyther any other Indian without the Portingalles pasport otherwise the Portingals army which yearly saileth along the coasts to kéepe them cleare from sea rouers for the safetie of their marchants finding them or any other Indian or nation whatsoeuer at sea without a pasport woulde take them for a prize as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring shippes from Cambaia Malabar or from the I le of Sumatra and other places that traffique to the redde sea These Mores of Cananor kéepe friendshippe with the Portingalles because of the fortresse which holdeth them in subiection yet couertly are their deadly enemies and secretly contribute and pay great summes of money to the other Malabars to the ende that they shoulde mischiefe and trouble the Portingalles by all the meanes they can deuise whose forme and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar From Cananor to Calecut are 8. miles which lyeth full vnder 11. degrées This towne of Calecut hath in times past béene the most famous Towne in all Malabar or India and it was the chiefe towne of Malabar where the Samoriin which is the Emperour holdeth his Court but because the Portingalles at their first comming and discouering of India were oftentimes deceyued by him they resorted to the King of Cochin who as then was subiect to the Samoriin being of small power But when the Portingals began to prosper in their enterprise and to get possession in the countrey and so became maisters of the sea Calecut beganne to decay and to lose both name and traffique and nowe at this time it is one of the townes of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrarie their King being very rich and richer then the Samoriin so that now he careth noe for him by means of the fauour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portingalles From Calecut to Cranganor are tenne myles and lyeth vnder tenne degrées and a halfe there the Portingalles haue a Fortresse From Cranganor to Cochin are tenne miles and lyeth not full vnder tenne degrées The towne of Cochin is inhabited by Portingals and naturall borne Indians as Malabars and other Indians that are christened it is almost as great as Goa very populous and well built with faire houses Churches and cloysters and a fayre and most pleasant Riuer with a good channell and a hauen a little beyonde the towne towards the land runneth a small riuer or water where sometimes men may passe ouer dry footed on the further side whereof lyeth a place called Cochin Dacyma and it is aboue Cochin which is in the iurisdiction of the Malabars who as yet continue in their owne religion there the King kéepeth his Court It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner and
Iland but they may fréelie vse them vpon the firme land and secretly in their houses thereby to shunne and auoid all occasions of dislike that might be giuen to Christians which are but newlie baptised but touching the worldly policie or good gouernement of the countrie and executing of iustice as also for the ruling of the townes men in the citie it is common to them all and they are vnder the Portingales law and he that is once christened and is after found to vse any heathenish superstitions is subiect to the Inquisition what so euer he be or for any point of Religion what so euer The Iland hath nothing of it self to nourish it withall but onely some cattle hennes goates doues c. but very fewe because of the barrennesse and euil situation of the place which is a most hillie barren and wild countrie and full of wast ground all their necessaries as beastes hennes hogges egges milke c. come from Salsette and Bardes but most part out of the firme land Corne Rice and other grayne also Oyle and all other necessaries come from other countries and are brought in by the Riuer as frō Cambaia on the North side and from the coast of Malabar and other places as in the description of the coast we haue in part declared of wyne called wyne of palme trées they haue inough and so much that they haue to spare for other places They haue but little fresh water but only one Well called Banganiin which stādeth about a quarter of a mile with out the Cittie wherewith the whole towne is serued which the slaues fetch in pots sel it in the towne and is verie good to drinke for water to dresse meat wash and doe other thinges withall they commonly haue Wels within their houses the land of it self is verie stonie and drie hauing a kinde of red earth so that some Italian Alchymistes haue promised to get Copper Gold out of the same which neither y e king nor Vice-roy would euer cōsēt vnto fearing least the report of such treasure would be occasion of greater troble vnto them by their enemies that are round about them through the desire that they haue of riches and therefore they haue deferred to séeke for it by the mappe hereafter following you may sée the situation of the Iland and Towne of Goa with all the stréetes Churches and places liuely described The 29. Chapter Of the customes of the Portingales and such as are issued from them called Mesticos or half countrimen as wel of Goa as of all the Oriental countries THe Portingales in India are many of them marryed with the naturall borne women of the countrie and the children procéeding of them are called Mesticos that is half countrimen These Mesticos are commonlie of yelowish colour notwithstanding there are manie women among them that are faire and well formed The children of the Portingales both boyes and gyrls which are borne in India are called Castisos and are in all things like vnto the Portingales onely somewhat differing in colour for they draw towards a yealow colour the children of those Castisos are yealow and altogether like the Mesticos and the children of Mesticos are of colour and fashion like the naturall borne Countrimen or Decaniins of the countrie so that the posteritie of the Portingales both men and womē being in the third degrée doe séeme to be naturall Indians both in colour fashion Their liuings and daylie traffiques are to Bengala Pegu Malacca Cambaia China and euerie way both North and South also in Goa there is holden a daylie assemblie or méeting together as wel of the Citizens and Inhabitants as of all nations throughout India and of the countries bordering on the same which is like the méeting vpō the burse in Andwarpe yet differeth much from that for that hether in Goa there come as well Gentlemen as marchants and others and there are all kindes of Indian commodities to sell so that in a manner it is like a Faire This méeting is onely before Noone euerie day in the yeare except Sondayes and holie dayes it beginneth in y e morning at 7. of the clocke and continueth till 9. of the clocke but not in the heate of the day nor after Noone in the principal stréete of the Citie named the straight stréete and is called the Leylon which is as much to say as an outroop there are certain cryers appointed by the Citie for y e purpose which haue of al things to be cryed and sold these goe all the time of the Leylon or outroop all behangd about with all sorts of gold chaines all kindes of costly Iewels pearles rings and precious stones likewise they haue running about them many sorts of captiues and slaues both men and women young and old which are daylie sould there as beasts are sold with vs where euerie one may chuse which liketh him best euerie one at a certaine price There are also Arabian horses all kinde of spices and dryed drugges sweet gummes and such like things fine and costly couerlets and many curious things out of Cambaia Sinde Bēgala China c. and it is wonderfull to sée in what sort many of them get their liuinges which euery day come thether to buy wares and at an other time sel them again And when any man dieth all his goods are brought thether sold to the last pennie worth in the same outroop who soeuer they be yea although they were the Viceroyes goods and this is done to doe right and iustice vnto Orphanes widdows and that it may be sold with the first where euerie man may sée it so that euerie yeare there is great quantitie of ware sold within that Citie for that there die many men within the Towne by meanes of their disordered liuing together with the hotenes of the coūtry the like assemblie is holden in all places of India where the Portingales inhabite There are some married Portingales that get their liuings by their slaues both men and women wherof some haue 12 some 20 and some 30 for it costeth them but little to kéepe them These slaues for money doe labour for such as haue néede of their helpe some fetch fresh water and sell it for money about the stréetes the women slaues make all sorts of confectures and conserues of Indian fruites much fyne néedle worke both cut and wrought workes and thē their maister send the fairest and the youngest of them well drest vp with their wares about the stréetes to sell the same that by the neatnes bewtie of the said women slaues men might be moued to buy which happeneth more for the affection they haue to the slaues to fulfill their pleasure with them then for any desire to the conserues or néedle workes for these slaues doe neuer refuse them but make their daylie liuing thereby and with the gaines that they by that meanes bring home their maisters may well kéepe and maintaine them There are others that
verie cunning and naturally subtill There are in the same steéet on the other side that haue all kindes of linnen and shirts with other clothes ready made for all sortes of persons as well slaues as Portingales and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes and such like wares with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia and all sortes of precious stones and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones pearles and corrals on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens which sell all sortes of bedstéedes stooles and such like stuffe very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke most pleasant to behold and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens which make all kinde of workes also diuers other handicrafts men as Coppersmithes Carpenters and such like occupations which are all heathens and euery one a stréet by themselues There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great with Corne Rice and other Indian wares and Marchandises as wood and such like Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites There are also many Heathen Brokers very cunning and subtill in buying and selling and with their tongues to pleade on both sides The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices which they sell by retaile both by waight and measure as Grocers and Potticaries doe with vs and this is onely vsed among them They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs for it is mingled with dust and garbish These are commonlie the Brainenes which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers haue their shops throughout the Cittie In euerie place and corner and vnder pentises whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed There are likewise many barbers which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them They kéepe no shoppes but for a small peece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot for it is déepe enough and without daunger In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there for there is no other exercise to be vsed but onely to sitte in their shirtes with a paire of linâ—en bréeches and goe passe the time away with their neighbours in playing and such exercises for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes or some garden whether they carry good store of victuailes there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season The summer beginneth in September and continueth till the last of Aprill and is alwaies clear sky fair weather without once or very little raining Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all places as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast and to conuoy Marchantes and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas whereby they are called Terreinhos that is to say the land windes They blow very pleasantly coolly although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous cause many great diseases which do commonly fall in India by y e chaunging of the time These winds blow alwaies in summer beginning at midnight and continue till noone but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea from off the coast and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight the west winde bloweth which commeth out of the sea into the lande and is called Vâ—rason These winds are so sure and certaine at their times as though men helde them in their handes whereby they make the land very temperate otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India that is from Diâ— to the Cape de Comorin on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel it is cleane contrarie so that there it is summer and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts and in some places but 2â— miles and which is more as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas which lyeth on the same coast of Choramandel and comming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather and going downe on the other side there is rayne winde thunder and lightning as if the worlde should end and be consumed which is to be vnderstood that it chaungeth from the one side to the other as the time falleth out so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter and on the other side Summer and it is not onely so in that place and countrey but also at Ormus on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte where the shippes lie it is very still cleare and pleasant water and faire summer time and turning about the Cape on the other side it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side and so it is in many places of the Orientall countries The sicknesses and diseases in Goa and throughout India which are common come most with the changing of the times and the weather as it is said before there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim which stealeth vppon men and handleth them in such sorte that it weakeneth a man and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie and many times his life withall This sicknesse is very common killeth many a man whereof they hardly or neuer escape The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers which are burning agues and consume mens bodies with extreame heate whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead This sicknes is common and very daungerous hath no remedie for the Portingalles but letting of blood but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes Sanders
stand a side vntill hee be past where soeuer they meete The Nayros weare the nayls of their hands very long wherby they shew that they are Gentlemen because the longnesse of the nayles doth let and hinder men from working or doing any labour They say likewise that they do it the better and faster to gripe a thing in their hands and to holde their Rapiers which some Portingales and Mesticos doe likewise vse and hold the same opinion with the Nayros whereof there are many in India which let their nayles grow for the same cause The principallest or chiefest of those Nayros which are leaders or Captaines of certaine numbers of Nayros weare a Gold or Siluer bracelet or ring about their armes aboue their elbowes as also their Gouernours Ambassadours and Kings whereby they are knowne from other men for otherwise they goe all naked Also their Kings rulers and other Captaines and leaders when they goe abroad are garded and accompanied by other Nayros They are verie good and stout souldiers and wil set vpon a man verie fiercely they are also verie full of reuenge so that whensoeuer they fight against their enemies either by water or by lande and that they chaunce to bee thrust into the body with a Pike they are not presently therewith content to lie downe but if they cannot spéedily plucke the Pike forth they will not spare to pull it forth with both their hands and draw it through their bodies therewith to set vpon them that gaue them the wound and to be reuenged on them Habitus et facies Mercatorum Goensium Indorum qui mutandis mercibus valde industrij Habyt en gedaente der â—ndiaensche Coopluyden welcke in hare handel seer cloeck zyn Banjanes e Cambaja populus â—sâ—andis gemmis scribendo supputandoque valdé â—ercitatus Banjanen vun Cambajen in t keâ— van gesteenten schryven en rekenen zeer geâ— Bramenes Idolorum in India Sacerdotes Bramenes der Indiuenscher affgoden Papen ofte Priesters Mâ—aniere van bruylost in t Lant van Ballagate achter Goa gelegen Bramenes cum mortuus est secundum eorum legem crematur uxor autem ejus proe amore sese vivam in ignem cum illo conjicit De Bramene do ot wesende wort nae haer wet verbrant en zyn vrouwe wt liefde haers mans verbrant haer levendich met hem Agricola Indus Canaryn dictus Een Indiaens sant ofte bouwman genaemt Canaryn Indorum liberi pro eorum consuetuâ—â—â—â— pudendis tantum rariori tela contectis Indiaensche kinderen al 's slants manier is 〈…〉 en die scha melheyt met een dun linnen doecksken be 〈…〉 hebbende Miles Indus quem lascarin nominant Een Indiaens soldaet lascarin geheeten Inda meretrix saltando et canendo victum queritans Een Indiaensche lichte vrouwe met dans sen en singen haer cost winnende Legati Regis Ballagatte in urbe Goa comitatus Die staet des Ambassateurs van den Coninck van Ballagatte binnen Goa Scaphae piscatoriae Goensium et Cochinensium alterae ex solido trunco exca vatae alterae e pluribus funibus coagmentatae priores Almadias alteras Tones et Paleguas vocant implent et hashâ—drijs aquae recentis quam ad naves deferentes di vendant quarum magnus illic numerus S 〈…〉 huÿten diemen te Goa en Cochÿn gebruÿckt om te visschen d'eene wt een hout wtgeholt lander wt veel struÿcken met coorden tsamen gebonden déerste worden Almadias â—'andere Tones en Paseguas genaemt die daer in groot getal zÿn welcken verladen â—et cruÿcken vol soet waters daer in gestort om aende schepen te vercoopen Naute Arabes quibus naves suas regendas Lusitani committunt in quibus cum uxoribus ut plurimum habitant Arâ—bischer scheepluÿden welcke die Portugeesen haer schepen vertrouwen te regeren in welcken sij oock met haer wyven meest woonen Habitus Abissinorum quibus loco S. Baptismatis frons nutiritur Habÿten der Abissÿnen wt paep tan slant welcke in plaets van doop gebruÿcken brantmercken in t aensicht Moerianen wt Mocambÿcke en die omliggende contreÿen diemen Caffres noemt sommighe zÿn Christenen sommighe Heydenen en tâ—neestendeel Machometisten The other common people of the Malabares called Polyas are such as are the couÌ„trie husband men and labourers men of occupations fishers and such like those are much contemned and dispised they liue very miserably and may weare no kind of weapon neyther yet touch or be coÌ„uersant with the Nayros for as the Nayros go on the stréetes and they heare him call they step aside bowing their armes and stooping with their heades down to the ground not daring so much as once looke vp before the Nayros be past in other thinges they obserue the customes of the other Indians for that euery man followeth the occupation of his Elders and may not change it for any thing The 43. Chapter Of the Moores and Iewes in India THere are great numbers of Moores and Iewes in al places of India as at Goa Cochin within the land some coming out of other places and the rest borne of Iewes and Moores in that country and so by birth right Indians who in times past by conuersation and company of those Iewes Moores haue bene brought to their sect and opinion In their houses and apparell they follow the manner of the land wherein they are resident amongst the Indians they haue their Churches Synagogues and Mesquitas wherein they vse all ceremonies according to their law but in the places where the Portingales inhabite and gouern it is not permitted vnto them to vse them openly neither to any Indian although they haue their families and dwelling houses and get their liuings and deal one with the other but secretly in their houses they may doe what they will so that no man take offence thereat without the townes and where the Portingales haue no commandement they may fréely vse and exercise their ceremonies and superstitions euery one as liketh him best without any man to let or deny them but if they be founde openlie doing it in the Portingales townes and iurisdictions or that they haue any point of Christian ceremonies mingled among theirs both men and womeÌ„ die for it vnlesse they turne vnto the christian faith as it oftentimes happeneth without the towne of Cochin where the King kéepeth his Court there the Iewes and Moores haue frée libertie to vse their sects and ceremonies openlie for there the Iewes haue made and built very fair stone houses and are rich marchants and of the king of Cochins néerest Counsellers there they haue their synagogue with their hebrue Bible and Moses Lawe which I haue had in my hand they are most white of colour like men of Europa haue many faire women There are manie of them that came out of the country of Palestina Ierusalem thether and speake ouer all the Exchange verie perfect and good Spanish they obserue the Saboth day and other iudiciall ceremonies and hope for the
afraide of gunne shot and of fire vnlesse by length of time they be vsed vnto them When they haue the companie one of the other the male Elephant standeth vpon the higher ground and the female somewhat lower As they goe along the way although you see them not you may heare them a farre off by the noyse of their féet and clapping of their eares which they coÌ„tinually vse They are as swift ingoing almost as a horse and are very proud and desirous of honour When there is any great feast or holiday kept in Goa with solemne procession commonly the Elephants go with them the yong before and the old behind and are all painted vppon their bodies with the Armes and Crosses of Portingall haue euery one fiue or six trumpetters or players vpon the Shalmes sitting vppon them that sound very pleasantly wherewith they are as well pleased and goe with as great grauitie and in as good order as if they were men It hapned in Goa that an Elephant shuld draw a great fust out of the water vnto the land which fust was so great and heauie that hee could not doe it alone so that they must haue another to help him whereupon the keeper chid him vsing many hard wordes saying that he was idle and weak and that it would be an euerlasting shame for him that they must fetch another to helpe him wherewith the Elephant was so desperate that he thrust away his fellow which was brought to help him and begâ—n freshly againe to draw with so great a force more then hee was well able to doe that with extreame labour hee burst and fell downe starke dead in the place At such time as I was to make my voyage froÌ„ Cochin to Portingall the Rudder of our ship was out of order so that it must of force be brought on land to make it fit againe and so it was drawn to the riuer side at the sterne of the boat which the Elephant should draw on land vppon two bordes that it might slide vp and because it was heauie as the Rudder of a ship of 1400. or 1600. tunnes requireth as also that the Elephant was as yet but yong and not growne to his ful strength so that he could not draw it out alone yet he did the best hee could but seeing hee could not doe it he fell on his fore legges and began to crie and weepe that the teares ran out of his eyes and because many of vs stoode vpon the shore to behold this sight the kéeper began to chide him and with hard words to curse him because he shamed him thus in presence of so many men not to be able to draw vp such a thing but what strength or labour soeuer the Elephant vsed he could not doe it alone but when they brought another Elephant to help him they both together drewe it halfe out of the water so that it lay partly vppon the bordes The first Elephant perceiuing that with his head and teeth thrust the other Elephant away and would haue no more helpe but drew it out himselfe whereby it may bee considered that they are in vnderstanding and desire of commendation like vnto men They are likewise very thankefull and mindfull of any good done vnto them When new yeares day coÌ„meth their kéepers vse of coÌ„mon custome to aske new yeres gifts of the Viceroy the Archbishop and other gouernours and Gentlemen and then the Elephants come to the dore and bow their heads downe and when any thing is giuen they knéele on their knees with great lowlinesse and thankefulnesse for the good déedes so done vnto their keepers which they thinke to bee done vnto themselues They vse as they passe by such houses to bow their heads at the dores as also when they passe by the Church doores and by Crosses which their Masters teach them They haue a custome that they goe often into the market where herbes are sold as Reddish Lettice Colworts and such like stuffe and those that are liberall to the Elephant doe vse to throw something before him Among the rest there was one Hearb wife which alwaies vsed to throw something of her wares before the Elephant Now wheÌ„ the time came on that the Elephant groweth mad as I said before they vse to goe with them thrée or foure dayes or a weeke about the stréets before they bind them vp beeing as then but halfe mad to ask something of euery body for the féeding of the mad ElephaÌ„t in the winter time And going thus about the stréetes the master is not able to rule him for hee runneth about with his head downeward and by his roaring giueth the people warning to beware and when he findeth or séeth no man hee leapeth and ouerthroweth whatsoeuer he méeteth withall whereby heâ— maketh great sport and pastime much like to the baiting of Oxen in Spaine which neuer ceaseth vntil one two or more of them be slaine the like rule is kept with the mad Elephant in India It chanced in this running about that the Elephhnt ran through the stréets and in haste at vnwares came into the market throwing downe all that was in his way whereat euery man was abasht and leauing their ware ranne to saue themselues from being ouer run by the Elephant and by meanes of the noyse and prease of people they fell one ouer another as in such cases is commonly seene Among them was this woman that alwaies vsed to giue the Elephant some thing to eat which had a little childe in the market lying by her in a basket and by the hastie rising vp and throng of the people the woman ran into a house not hauing time to snatch vp her Child and take it with her and when the Elephant was alone in the market place where he roared vp and downe ouerthrowing all thinges that were before him hee came by the child that as I said lay still in the market and as euery man looked specially the mother which cried out verily thought that the Elephant had taken it and cast it on his shoulder and spoiled it as he did all other thinges Hee on the contrarie notwithstanding all his madnesse béeing mindfull of the good will and liberalitie of the childes mother dayly vsed vnto him tooke vp the child handsomlie and tenderly with his snout and layde it softly vpon a stall by a shop side which done hee began againe to vse the same order of stamping crying and clapping as he had done at the first to the great wondering of al that beheld it specially to the ease and ioy of the mother that had recouered her child sound and well againe These and such like examples do often happen in India which would be too long to rehearse and therfore I thought good onely to set these thrée or foure before your eyes as things worthy memorie thereby to teach vs to bee mindfull of all good déeds done vnto vs and with thankfulnes to requite them considering that these
inwardly yealowish but in cutting it is waterish yet some not so much they haue a verie pleasant taste better then a Peach and like the Annanas which is y e best y e most profitable fruit in al India for it yeeldeth a great quātity for food sustenance of the countrie people as Oliues do in Spaine and Portingale they are gathered when they are gréene and conserued and for the most part salted in pots and commonlie vsed to be eaten with Rice sodden in pure water the huske being whole and so eaten with salt Mangas which is the continuall food for their slaues and cōmon people or else salt dryed fish in stéed of Mangas without bread for Rice is in diuers places in stéed of bread These salted Mangas are in cutting like the white Spanish Oliues and almost of the same taste but somewhat sauorie and not so bitter yet a little sowre and are in so great abundance that it is wonderful there are others that are salted and stuffed with small péeces of gréene Ginger and Garlike sodden those they call Mangas Recheadas or Machar they are likewise much vsed but not so common as the other for they are costlie and more esteemed these are kept in pots with Oyle and Vineger salted The season when Mangas are ripe is in Lent and continueth till the Moneth of August The 52. Chapter Of Caions THis fruite groweth on great trees not much vnlike Apple trees but the yong trees haue leaues like Lawrell or Bayleaues they are of a pale greene and thicke with white blossoms like Oringe trees but thicker of leaues yet not so sweete of smell The fruit is in greatnesse and forme like a Goose Egge or a great Apple verie yellow of good sauor moyst or spungie within and ful of Iuice like Lemmons but without kernels sweete of taste but yet harsh in a mans throate they seeme not to haue beene common in East India but brought thether from Brasillia where those Nuts are much eaten although Theuet in his description of America 61. Chapter writeth otherwise At the end of this fruit groweth a Nut of forme like the Kydney of a Hare whereof I had many brought me by a Pylot of Portingall of an Ash colour or when they are ripe of a reddish Ash colour These Nuts haue two partitions betweene which two partitions there is a certain spongious fattie matter like Oyle hotte and sharpe but in the innermost part thereof is a white kernell very pleasant to eate like Pistaccios with a gray skin ouer it which is pulled off These Nuts being a little rosted are eaten in that sort vsed to prouoke lust The fruit and also the Nuts are vsed in bankets being eaten with wine without wine because of their good taste They are good for the weaknesse of the Maw and against perbreaking and loathing of meate but such as will not vse them to that ende doe eate them only dipped or steeped in a little water the sharpe Oyle betweene both the partitions is verie good for Saint Anthonies fire and flashing in mens faces The Brasilians vse it against scurffes this tree was at the first planted of the very Nut but the first and greatest fruite had neither seede nor kernell some thinke it to bee a kind of Anacardy because it is very like it for the sharpe iuyce that is betweene the partitions Reade more hereafter in Carolus Clusius his obseruations vppon Graciam first Booke and third Chapter Cajus groweth on trées like apple trées and are of the bignes of a Peare at one end by the stalk somewhat sharp and at the head thicker of a yelowish colour being ripe they are soft in hādling they grow very like aples for wher the apples haue a stalke these Cajus haue a Chesnut as big as the fore ioynt of a mans thumb they haue an other colour and fashion then the Chesnuts of Iaqua and are better more sauorie to eate but they must be rosted within they are white like y e Chesnuts of Europa but haue thicker shelles which are of colour blewish and dark gréene When they are raw and vnrosted you must not open them with your mouth for as soone as you put them to your mouth they make both your tongue and your lippes to smart whereby such as know it not are deceiued wherefore you must open their shelles with a knife or rost them and then they wil péele This fruite at the end wher the stalke groweth in the eating doth worke in a mans throate and maketh it swel yet it is of a fyne taste for it is moyst and full of iuice they are commonlie cut in round slices and layd in a dish with water or wyne and salt throwne vpon them for so they do not worke so strōglie but are verie good and sauorie to eate the time when they are ripe is in Lent and in Winter time like Mangas but not so good as Mangas or Ananas and of lesse account They are likewise in great numbers ouer all India The 53. Chapter Of Iambos IN India ther is an other fruit that for the beautie pleasant taste smell and medicinable vertue thereof is worthie to bee written of and is of great account in India being first brought out of Malacca into India The tree whereon this fruite groweth is as great as the greatest Orange tree in all Spaine with manye branches which spread verie broade and make much shadow and is faire to behold The bodie and great branches thereof haue an ash colour-gray barke the leaues are faire soft longer then the breadth of a hand they are somewhat like the point of a Speare or Pike with a thicke threed or veine in the midle and many small veines or branches in the sides outwardly verie greene and inwardly somewhat bleaker with blossomes of a liuely darke Purple colour with many streekes in the middle verie pleasant to beholde and of taste like the twynings or tendrels of a Vine The fruite is as bigge as a Peare or as some are of opinion of the bignesse and colour of a great Spanish Wal-nut they tooke their name of a King Ther are two sorts of this fruit one a browne red seeming as though it were blacke most part without stones and more sauory then the other which is a palered or a pale Purple colour with a liuely smell of Roses and within it hath a little white hard stone not verie rounde much like a Peach stone white and couered with a rough skin This is not ful so great as the other yet are they both fit for such as haue daintie and licorous mouthes They smel like sweete Roses they are colde and moyst and altogether soft couered with a thinne Rinde which cannot be taken off with a knife The Iambos tree taketh deepe roote within foure yeares after it is set doth beare fruit and that many times in one yeare and is neuer without fruite or blossomes for that commonly euerie branch hath both
grow in India many Iniamos and Batatas These Iniamos are as bigge as a yelow roote but somewhat thicker and suller of knots and as thicke on the one place as in the other they grow vnder the earth like earth Nuts and of a Dun colour and white within like earth Nuts but not so swéete Iniamos were this yeare brought hethâ— out of Guinea as bigge as a mans legge and all of a like thicknesse the outward part is Dun coloured within verie white rosted or sodden they are verie pleasant of taste and one of the principal meates of the Black-Moores The Batatas are somewhat red of colour and of fashion almost like the Iniamos but swéeter of taste like an earth Nut. These two fruits are verie plentifull specially Iniamos which is as common and necessarie a meate as the Figges they eate them for the most part rosted and vse them commonly for the last seruice on the boorde they â—eth them likewise in an other sort for â—orrage and sâ—eth them with flesh like Colwortes or Turnops the like doe they with Batatas The 56. Chapter Of the Palme trees whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocus doe grow THese Trées are commonlie called by most of the Indians Persians and Arabians Maro the nuts Nareâ— The Malabares call the Trees Tenga Maran and the fruite being ripe Tenga but vnripe and being as yet greene 〈◊〉 In Goa â—anha the Portingalls call this fruit Coquo by reason of the thrée holes that are therein like to a Munkies head Auicenna calleth these Iaâ—ial-Indi that is Indian nuts The Malayans of Malacca call the trees Trican and the fruit Nihor This is the most profitable tree of all India as in order I will declare vnto you the profit that ariseth thereby they grow most in the Islands of Maldiua and in Goa and the countries round about them as also through the whole coast of Malabar whereby they traffique with them into all places as to Cambaia Ormus c. The tree wareth very high and straight of the thickenes of a small spanne little more or lesse it hath no branches but in the vppermost part thereof in the top grow the leaues which spread like vnto Date trées and vnder the leaues close to the tree grow the Coquos together commonly ten or twelue one close by another but you shall seldome finde one of them growing alone by it self The blossome of this fruite is very like the blossome of a Chestnut The wood of the tree is very sappy like a spunge and is not firme they doe not grow but on the sea sides or bankes of riuers close by the strand and in sandie grounds for there groweth none within the land They haue no great rootes so that a man would thinke it were impossible for them to haue any fast hold within the earth and yet they stand so fast and grow so high that it maketh men scare to see men clime vppon them least they should fall downe The Canarijns clime as nimbly and as fast vpon them as if they were Apes for they make small steppes in the trées like staires whereon they step and so clime vp which the Portingales dare not veÌ„ter their planting is in this manner They first plant the Coquos or Nuts whereof the trees doe spring and when they are about the height of a man in winter time they plant them againe and dung them with ashes and in summer time water them They growe well about houses because commonlie there they haue good earth and beeing well looked vnto and husbanded they yeeld fruit in fewe yeares which is the Canarijns liuinges that dwell here and there among those trees and haue no other occupation but onely to dresse those trees which they farme of the Landlords and by the fruite thereof doe get their liuinges Those trees are more aboundant with them then Oliue trées in Spaine or willow trées in the Low countries The profits they reape thereby are these First the wood is very good for many things although it be spungious and â—appy by reason of the length of it for in the Islandes of Maldiua they make whole ships thereof without any iron nayles in them for they sow them together with the cordes that are made of the said Cocus or Nut the ropes and cables beeing likewise of the same tree as also the sayles which they make of the leaues which leaues are called Olas They serue likewise to make the Canarijns houses and for hattes which they vse to carrie ouer their heades for the sunne or the raine they make also mattes or Tents that lie ouer the Palamkins when it raineth to couer the women when they are caried abroad and such like thinges they likewise make thereof very fine Hattes that are much esteemed and cost three or foure Pardawes the péece which they weare in Summer for lightnes They farme or hire those trées for two causes one for the Coquos or fruit to eate it the other to presse wine out of them thereof to drinke The nuts are as great as an estrige egge some smaller and some greater and are outwardly couered with a Huske or Shell which as long as it groweth on the trée is gréene with out like an Acorne with his huske or cup. The Indian nuts are couered ouer with two sortes of huskes or shels whereof the vttermost is hayrie and of it they make Cairo that is all their cables and ropes and stop and make their ships close with it in stead of Ocam or tow for that it keepeth the ships closer in saltwater then our Ocam or Tow because in salt water it closeth and shutteth it selfe closer together Of the other they make not onelie drinking cups in India but here with vs also for that the common people beleeue there is a certaine vertue in them against stirring of the body but it is not so This Huske beeing drie and pulled off is haire like hempe whereof all the cordes and Cables that are vsed throughout al India are made as well vppon the land as in the ships it is of colour verie like the ropes of Sparta in Spaine they are very good but they must be kept in salt water whereby they continue very long but in fresh or raine water they doe presently rot because they are not drest with pitch and tarre as our ships are The ship wherein I came out of India into Portingall had no other ropes nor cables nor any such kinde of stuffe but such as were made of the Indian Cocus called Cayro which continued very good sauing only y t we were forced euery fourtéene dayes to wash our cables in the Sea whereby they serued vs as well as cables of hemp The fruit when it is almost ripe is called Lanha and within is full of water and then it is white of colour thin and soft and the longer the Cocus is on the tree the more the water groweth and changeth into white which is the meat of the nut within
and tasteth much like a hasel nut but somewhat sweeter The Lanhos haue within them a good draught of water which is very cleare sweet and coole to drink It is at the least halfe a Can full when men walke abroad and are thirstie they go vnto the Canarijns who presently with a great knife in their handes come vp the tree and cut off as many Lanhos as a man desireth selling them for a Basaruco or a two peece which they make very ready and cleare to be drunke the first shell that is ouer the inward fruit which as the nut is come to his full ripenes becometh almost to bee wood is then but thin and soft and very pleasant to eate with salt and do taste almost like Artichokes a man may drinke as much of this water as hee will for it will not hurt him but is a verie pleasant drinke when the fruit is ripe there is not so much water in it and is white within and somewhat thicker of substance and then the water is not so good as it was before beeing Lanhos for then it becommeth somewhat sower These Cocus being yet in their husks may be carried ouer the whole world and not once hurt or brused and it happeneth oftentimes that by continuance of time the water within the Cocus doth conuert and congeale into a certaine kinde of yellow apple which is verie sauorie and sweet The huske beeing taken off the shel serueth for many vses as to make ladles with woodden handles and also certaine little pots which beeing fastned to a sticke they doe therewith take and lade water out of their great pots they make thereof also small vessels to beare wine in when they walke into the fieldes and a thousand other thinges These shelles are likewise burnt serue for coales for Goldsmithes which are very good and excellent Of the white of these nuts in India they make porrage and dresse meate withall strayning and pressing out the milke wherin with many other mixtures they seeth their rice to bee short they neuer dresse any rice which they cal Carrijl is the sauce to their meate thereunto but they put some of their Cocus milk into it els the Cocus is but little eaten for there it is not esteemed of but serueth for meate for the slaues and poore people They likewise breake the Cocus in péeces and taking off the shell they drie the fruit or white meat that is within it and it is caried in great quantities out of Malabar to Cambaia and Ormus to the Northern coastes and quarters beyond Goa as also to the countrie of Ballagate traffique much therewith Of this white substance they make Oyle which they stampe in cesterns like Oliues and it maketh verie good oyle as well to eat as to burne which is likewise very medicinable There are two sortes of Oyle made of these nuts one out of the fresh or greene nuts stamped and mixed with warme water which beeing pressed foorth the oyle swimmeth aboue the water◠this oyle is vsed to purge the maw and the guts for it purgeth very gently without hurt some mixe therewith the iuyce of Thamarindes maketh thereof a verie wholesome medecine the other Oyle is prest out of the dried Cocus which is called Copra is good also to purge the maw and against the shrinking of the sinews as also for old aches and paines in the ioyntes and lims This dried Cocus which is so caried abroad is called Copra When they desire to haue no Cocus or fruite thereof they cut the blossomes of the Cocus away and binde a round Potte with a narrow mouth by them called Callao fast vnto the tree and stop the same close round about with pot earth so that neyther wine nor aire can eyther enter in or come forth in that sort the pot in short space is full of water which they call Sura is very pleasant to drinke like sweet whay somewhat better This water being drunke is very good against the heate of the liuer and the kidnies and cleanseth the yard from corruption and filthie matter The same water standing but one houre in the sunne is very good viniger and in India they haue none other This Sura beeing distilled is called Fula or Nipe is as excellent aqua vitae as any is made in Dor◠of their best rēnish wine but this is of the finest kinde of distillation The second distillation thereof is called Vraca which is verie good wine is the wine of India for they haue no other wine It is very hot strong yet y e Indians drinke it as if it were water the Portingales vse it in this sort They put it into vessels and to a pipe of Vraca they put 3. or 4. Hands of reasons that are brought for marchandise into India from Ormus euerie Hand is 12. poundes which beeing washed they put into the vessell leauing the bung opē the pipe not being full for if it were it wold burst by reason of the heat because therewith it séetheth in the Pipe like water on the fire and boyling so it is stirred euery day for the space of fourteene or fifteene dayes in which time the Vraca getteth as faire a redde colour as if it were Portingall wine and differeth not much in taste but yet sweeter and hotter of it selfe howbeit it is altogether as fayre and of as good a colour as their Portingall Wyne so that they can hardly bee discerned one from the other this Wine is called Wine of Passa or Reasons With this Wine there is great traffique vsed to Bengala Malacca China and other places and euery Pipe thereof costeth within Goa 30. Pardawen the péece little more or lesse Of the aforesaide Sura they likewise make Sugar which is called Iagra they seeth the water and set it in the Sun whereof it becommeth Sugar but it is little estéemed because it is of a browne colour and for that they haue so great quantitie and abundance of white Sugar throughout all India The innermost parte of the trée or trunke is called Palmito and is the pith or hart of the same trunke which is much estéemed and sent for a present vnto men of great account It is as thinne as Paper and also white and is as if it were plaited or prest together as they vse to plait presse womens huykes in the Low countries it is also long and slender and hath sometimes 50. or 60. foldes or plaites in it like a paper booke This the Indians vse for paper and bookes which continueth in the same foldes whereon they write when it is gréene and so let it drie and then it is impossible to get the letters out againe for it is printed therein with a kind of Iron instrument The Indians cal it Olla whereof all their bookes wrytinges and Euidences are made which they can seale and shutte vp as we doe our letters Of this Paper with the
two knots or partitions vncarued In those scutes the Indians sit naked at ech end one crosse legged in each hand an oare wherewith they rule the boate and driue her swiftly against the streame specially in the riuer called Cranganor and they are of this opinion that those Scutes are neuer ouerturned by the Crocodiles although they come about them as others are but for these it was neuer heard of The 59. Chapter Of the tree called Arbore Triste THe Tree called Arbore Triste that is the sorrowfull tree is so called because it neuer beareth blossoms but in the night time and so it doeth and continueth all the yeare long it is a thing to be wondred at for that so soone as the Sunne setteth there is not one blossome seene vppon the tree but presently within halfe an houre after there are as many blossomes vppon it as the Tree can beare they are very pleasant to behold and smell very sweet and so soone as the day commeth on and the Sunne is rising presently all the blossomes fall off and couer all the ground so that there remayneth not one to be seene vpon the tree the leaues shut themselues close together so that it seemeth as though it were dead vntill euening commeth againe and then it beginneth to blossome as it did before the tree is as great as a Plum tree and is commonly planted behinde mens houses in their gardens for a pleasure and for the sweet smell it groweth very quickly vp for that many young plantes do spring out of the roote and as soone as those young plantes be aboue halfe a fadome high they haue presently as many blossoms vppon them as the branches on the trees and although they cut the tree down to the ground yet within lesse then halfe a yeare there will branches spring out of the roote and likewise if you breake a branch off from the tree set it in the earth it will presently take root and grow within few dayes after beareth blossoms the blossomes are in a manner like Orange tree blossomes the flowre being white and in the bottome somewhat yellow and reddish which in India they vse for Saffron therewith to dresse their meats and to die with all as wee doe with our Saffron but it is neyther so good nor of so pleasant a taste yet it serueth there for want of the other Some say that the water of this tree being distilled is good for the eyes steeping linnen clothes in it and so laying them to the eyes This tree is found in no place but in Goa and Malacca in some other places where the Portingalles inhabiting haue planted them for that they first came out of Malacca into India but within the land there is none they are called in the Malayan tongue Singady in Decanun Parisatico in Decan Pul of the Arabians Guart of the Persians and Turkes Gâ—l The cause of this name as the Indians say is that a Gentleman â—alled Parisatico had a faire daughter of whom the Sunne became amorous and in the end obtained his pleasure of her but not long after he fell in loue with another forsook her wherupon she falling into dispaire killed herselfe and according to the custome of the countrie her body was burnt of whose ashes they say this tree sprang vp and for the same cause was called Parisaâ—ico and therefore they say by reason of the hatred it beareth vnto the Sunne it neuer bringeth foorth blossome or flowre but hy night and in the day time for griefe they presently fall off The description of this Tree by Christopherus de Costa is set downe in this manner that it is of the greatnes and similitude of a plumme tree with many small branches seperated by diuers knots and partitions the leaues growing two and two together and as bigge as plumme tree leaues soft and rough on the out side verie like to leaues of Sage and inwardlie greene and somewhat sharp but not so vneuen on the sides as plumme leaues neyther yet so full of veines In the middle betweene the two leaues there groweth a little stalke whereon are fiue small heads out of them foure little rough leaues out of the middest wherof there doe spring fiue small white blossomes of the greatnesse and forme of Orange blossomes but somewhat smaller fairer and sweeter The stalke seemeth more red than yellow wherewith the Indians colour their meate as wee doe with Saffron The greene fruite is of the greatnes of a Lupyne and in fashion like a little hart somwhat long and deuided in the middle hauing two places wherein the seed doth lie which is also like a hart and as bigge as the seeds of Saint Iohns bread couered with a greene Skin and somewhat bitter Of all other Trees these are the pleasantest of smell so that they bee not handled for if they be they doe presently loose their sweetnes and smell The Indians are of opinion that these flowers doe quicken and comfort the heart but they are somewhat bitter the Heathens likewise doe account the seede among their medicines that strengthen the hart The flowers may be vsed in meat the seed hath oftentimes bin caried into Portingall and there sowed but neuer would grow what meanes soeuer they vsed the flowers fall off when the sunne riseth as Clusius saith eyther by reason of some contrariety or because of the subtill nature of the sap which the beames of the Sunne doe drie and consume for those wheron the Sunne shineth not stay somewhat longer on the tree These flowers are very carefully gathered whereof a very sweet and pleasant water is distilled which is called water de Mogli some of this seede was brought me out of India by Iohn Hughen which I sowed in the grouÌ„d but it came not forth The 60. Chapter Of the Bettele leaues the fruit Arecca THe leaues called Bettâ—eâ—e or Bettre which is very common in India and dayly eaten by the Indians doe grow in all places of India where the Portingals haue discouerd not with in the countrie but only on the sea coast vnlesse it bee some small quantitie It wil not growe in cold places as China nor in ouer hot places as Mosambique and Sofala and because it is so much vsed I haue particularly set it downe in this place although it is already spoken of in many other places You must vnderstand that this Bettele is a leafe somewhat greater and longer out than Orange leaues and is planted by sticks wherevpon it climeth like Iuie or pepper and so like vnto pepper that a farre off growing each by other they can hardlie bee descerned It hath no other fruite but the leaues only it is much dressed and looked vnto for that it is the dayly breade of India The leaues being gathered doe continue long without withering alwaies shewing fresh and greene and are sold by the dozen and there is not any woman or man in all India but that euery day
blacke sauing the first outmost huske is white and smooth without any wrinckle but hath the verie self same vertue and taste that black pepper hath It cometh oftentimes mingled with the Malacca pepper The pepper that groweth in the countries about Malacca is many times also brought into Portingal but verie little for that it is 2 yeares betweene euery ship that sayleth out of Portingale thither which being there taketh in some pepper but most Cloues and Nutmegges with their flowers and other marchandises of China But the most part of that pepper is vsed in the same countries as in Pegu Syon specially in China and other countries bordering on the same which deal continually one with an other Pepper by the Malabares is called Molanga and in the countries by Malacca Lada in Arabia Filâ—il the Gusarates of Cambaia and Decamins of Ballagate cal it Meriche and they of Bengala Moroâ—s and the long pepper which groweth onely in BeÌ„gâ—la and Iaua is called Pelcâ—m Pepper groweth and is planted at the foote of an other trée and most part at the foote of the trée called Arecca or some such like trée groweth vpon the tree like Bettele or Iue The leaues of pepper are like Orange leaues but somewhat smaller they are green and sharp at the ends in the chawing it biteth the tong and tasteth much like to Bettele it growes in bunshes like grapes but a great deale lesser and thynner yet somewhat thicker then Gooseberries they are alwaies green til they begin to drie and to ripen which is in DeceÌ„ber and Ianuary for at that time they are gathered The long pepper groweth in Bengala and some in the Iland of Iaua and is an other kinde of trée the long pepper is of the length of a néedle or the tagge of a point but somewhat thicker and all of a like thicknes it is outwardly rugged and of an ashie colour and within somewhat white with small seedes but in taste and vse it is like the other black and white pepper The white pepper as I sayd is like the black both in taste and forme yet it is accounted for better stroÌ„ger and is not in so great quantitie as the black The Pepper called Canariins in the countrie of Goa and Malabar almost of the fashion of Panike it is of an ashe colour and holow within with some smal kernels which in eating tasteth and heateth like other pepper yet it is vsed onely by the poore people and therefore is called Canariin pepper that is to say Countrie mens pepper or poore peoples pepper therefore it is neuer laden away for it is verie course and of little value neither would it be able to rayse the fraight and therfore is it left in the countrie The other pepper is in India and all other Eastern countries much vsed and spent by the Indians themselues and that in greater quantitie then yearelie is carried or laden from thence for other places for they eate not any kinde of meate but they put therein handfuls of pepper al vnbeaten so that they waste the more In the description of Malabar I haue set downe in what places pepper doth grow and is coÌ„monlie laden and the hauens where the Portingall shippes doe come and fetch it therefore it néedeth not here to be rehearsed pepper is likewise much vsed wheÌ„ it is green to be put in pots with vineger and salt and so is kept a long time and in the same manner carryed into Portingal but it is most vsed in that sort to be eaten in India and is called pepper in Achar in which manner they vse to dresse all other sorts of spices in India and eate it commonlie to procure an appetite as we doe Capars Oliues and Lemons being pickled Pepper is vsed in the kitchen and in Apothecaries shoppeâ— although in both places not as a meate or food but for physicke it warmeth the mawe and consumeth the cold slymenes thereof to ease the payne in the mawe which proceedeth of rawnesse and wind It is good to eate fyue pepper cornes euerie morning He that hath a bad or thick sight let him vse pepper cornes with annis â—ennel seed and Cloues for thereby the mystinesse of the eyes which darken the sight is cleered and driueÌ„ away The Apotheâ—ries make a confection of 3. sorts oâ— peppeâ— in this sort of whâ—te blacke and â—ong Pepper of each 25 draÌ„mes wilde tyme ginger â—nis seed of each an ouâ—ce with honnie is much as needeth to make a conâ—eâ— which is good for such as haue a cold 〈◊〉 the Nucken the paine in the liuer and the Dropsie The 63. Chapter Of Cinamom CInamon in Latin is called Cinamoâ— by the Arabians Quirsa by the Persians Daâ—china by the men of Seylon where it most groweth Curdo of the people of Malacca Caysman and by the Malabares Camea the trees are as great as Oliue trees and some lesser with leaues of Colmi like Baye leaues but of fashion like Citron leaues though somewhat smaller They haue white blossomes and a certaine fruite of the greatnes of black Portingall Oliues whereof also Oyle is made which is vsed for manie thinges The tree hath two barkes but the second bark is the Cinamon it is cut off in foure square péeces and so laid to dry at the first it is ashe colour after as it beginneth to dry it roulleth together of it self and looketh of the colour as it commeth hether which procéedeth of the heate of the Sunne The trée from whence the barke is taken they let it stand within 3 yeres after it hath an other barke as it had before These trees are in great abundance for they grow of themselues without planting in the open fields like bushes the roote of this tree yeeldeth a water which smelleth like Camphora it is forbidden to be drawn forth for spoyling the trees The Cinamon that is not wel dried is of ashe colour that which is ouer much dryed blackish but the best dryed is reddish there is much and excellent water distilled out of CinamoÌ„ while it is half gréen which is much vsed in India manie times caryed into Portingal and other places it is very pleasant both to drinke and to smell but very hote and strong it is vsed against the Colicke and other diseases procéeding of cold it is likewise good against a stincking breath and euill sauor of the mouth There is likewise a water made of the blossomes of this tree but not so good nor so well esteemed as that of Cinamon it self The places where Cinamon groweth is most and best in the IlaÌ„d of Seylon wherin there is whole woods full of Cinamon trees in the coast of Malabar there groweth likewise great store and some woods of Cinamon but not half so good and lesser trees the barke being grayer and thicker and of smal vertue The Cinamon of the Iland of Seylon is the best and finest and is at the least three times dearer in the price The
Cinamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wilde Cinamon and is forbidden to be carried into Portingale yet there is great quantity shipped but all vnder the name of Cinamon of Seylon whereby it passeth and the King hath his full custome as well for the good as for the bad When the â—on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale the wilde Cinamon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes but it is all registred in India for Seylons Cinamon and payeth custome in Lisbon each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes as well the good as the bad and all other spices after the rate and there may be nothing shipped in India no not so much as the slaues but it must all be registred in Cochin and if there be any thing found to be brought into Portiâ—l and not registred there it is forfait to the King There groweth Cinamon also in the Ilands of Iaua and by Malacca but very little and not so good as that of Seylon The trees which they burne in India for wood some of them are like Cinamon in burning and smell Cinamon healeth it openeth streÌ„gtheneth all the inward parts it is somewhat attractiue stretcheth the mawe and digesteth the meate it is also vsed against all kinde of poyson that may hurt the hart Cinamon with Pennyâ—oy all and Biuoet water drunk driueth away the Volgher openeth the matrice and maketh women haue their flowers it is likewise good against Fusten and Catharres that fall downe from the head into the lower parts also against the Dropsie and breaking or stopping of the kidneyes c. The water and Oyle of Cinamon doe greatlie strengthen all the inward parts as head hart mawe and lyuer c. The 64. Chapter Of Ginger GInger groweth in manie places of India yet the best most caryed abroad is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar it groweth like thin and young Netherland reedes of two or thrée spannes high the roote whereof is the Ginger being greene it is much eaten in India for sallets as also sodden in Vineger which they call Achar as I said of pepper and other fruites that are vsed in that maÌ„ner throughout al India the time wheÌ„ they are most gathered and begun to be dried is in December and Ianuarie they drie it in this sort that is they couer it with pot-earth which they doe to stop and fill vp the holes and thereby to make it continue the fresher for the pot-earth preserueth it from wormes without the which it is presentlie consumed by them it is little estéemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus Arabia and Asia but little for Portingal because it will not saue y e fraught and custome onlie the gunner of the Indian shippes may lade and bring certaine Quintals without paying any custome which by the King of Portingale was of long tyme granted vnto them and is yet obserued and this they may fel to marchants and so by this meanes there is some brought otherwise but very little for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain cometh from Cabo verde the Ilands of S. Thomas Brasiliâ— and the IlaÌ„d of S. Domingo in y e spanish Indies which is much trafficked withall in Spaine wherefore that of the Portingall Indies is little brought out of the couÌ„try because of the loÌ„g way great charges yet it is better theÌ„ other Ginger as also all other spices mettals and stones that are brought out of the Orientall Indies that is out of the Portingales Indies are for goodnesse and vertue better then any other which the continuall traffique hath sufficiently made knowne There is likewise much Ginger conserued in Suger which commeth out of the countrie of Bengala but the best commeth from China it is verie good to eate and much vsed in India broght out of Portingal into these countries Ginger by the Arabians Persians and Turkes is called Gengibil in Gusurate Decan and Bengala when it is freshe and greene Adrac and when it is dryed Sucte in Malabar both dryed green Imgi in Malayo Aliaa It groweth like water Lillies or Sword-hearbe but somewhat blacker with a stalke aboute two or three handfuls high and with a roote like a Lillie not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth and is not so sharpe specially that which groweth in Bacaim because of the ouer great moysture This roote is cut small and mixed with other rootes and so eaten for Sallets with oyle salt and Vineger it is also sodden with flesh and fish It goweth in all places of India and is sowed or Planted for that which commeth vp of it selfe is not so good The best and greatest store commeth out of Malabar and by the Arabians and Persians it is much desired next it is the Ginger of Bengala The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast along in the wilde fields and inwardly within the land there is little found There is also some found in the Ilands of S. Laurence and Comaro The vertue and properties of Ginger is that it maketh a man to goe easily to the stoole and restoreth a mans strength that is decayed But it is found contrary in other Authors that Ginger stoppeth for that it causeth good digestion and so laskements proceeding of raw moystnesse is stopped It heateth a colde maw and is good against humors that darken the eyes and is vsed in many medicines The 65. Chapter Of Cloues CLoues are by the Turkes Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Caâ—aâ—â—r and in the Ilands of Maluco where they are only found and do grow Chamke These Ilands are fine lying vnder the Equinoctiall line as in the descriptions therof is declared They haue nothing else but Cloues which are caried froÌ„ thence through out the world the trees whereon they grow are like Bay-trées the blossomes at the first white then greene and at the last red and hard which are the Cloues and when the blossomes are gréene they haue the pleasantest smell in all the world The Cloues grow verie thicke together and in great numbers they are gathered and then dried their right colour when they are drie is a darke yelow and to giue them a blacke colour they are commonly smoked The Cloues that stay on the trée vngathered are thicke and stay on till the next yeare which are those that are called the mother of the Cloues And in the place where the trées stand there groweth not any grasse or gréene Hearbe at all but it is wholly drie for that those trees draw all the moysture vnto them That which the Portingals call Baston or with vs the stocke of the Cloue and is the stalke whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Cloues and so they are mingled together for that in Maluco they neuer garble their Cloues but in India they are many times parted though verie little for they are
most part sold and vsed with dust and stalkes and all together but such as are to bee sent to Portingall are seuered and clensed The Cloues are so hotte of nature that whensoeuer them are made cleane and seperated from their Garbish if there chance to stand either Tubbe or Payle of water in the Chamber where they clense them or any other vessell with wine or any kind of moysture it will within two dayes at the furthest be wholly soken out and dryed vp although it stand not néere them by reason of the great heate of the Cloues that draw all moysture vnto them as by experience I haue often séene The same nature is in the vnspunne Silke of China so that whensoeuer the Silke lyeth any where in a house vpon the flowre that is to say vppon boordes a foote or two aboue the ground and that the flowre is sprinkled and couered with water although it toucheth not the Silke in the Morning all that water will bee in the Silke for that it draweth it all vnto it And this tricke the Indians often times vse to make their Silke weigh heauie when they sel it for it can neither be séen nor found in the Silke But returning to our matter the Cloues grow about the length of a great shot from the Sea side and are neither planted nor set and nothing else is done vnto them but only when they plucke and gather them they make the place vnder the trées verie cleane The trée will not grow verie close to the Sea side nor farre from it for these Ilands are altogether compassed about with the Sea When it is a fruitfull yeare then the Cloues are in greater abundance then the leaues When they gather them they do not pluck them with their hands but with ropes which they fasten about the branches and by force they shake them off and by that meanes the trées are so spoyled that the next yeare after they yeelde but little fruite but the second yeare then after ensuing there grow vp trées of the Cloues that fell vpon the ground when they gathered them two yeares before like Chesnut trées and they growe verie sound because of the great rayne that falleth in those places for those Ilandes lye vnder the Equinoctiall line and yéelde fruite within eight yeares and so continue aboue a hundreth yeares The time when they are gathered and dried is from September to Ianuarie When the Cloues are gréene they make good conserues in Sugar and are likewise salted in Vineger so kept in pots and made of Achar in which manner they are carried into Malacca and India They likewise distill water out of the gréen Cloues which is verie cordiall and vsed in many Medecines The Indian women vse much to chawe Cloues thereby to haue a swéete breath which the Portingales wiues that dwell there doe now begin to vse the leaues of the Cloue-trees are altogether like Bay-leaues Cloues grow on trees like Bay-trees both in forme and quantitie saue onely that their leaues are somthing lesser like Almonds or Willow leaues They are full of branches and haue aboundance of blossomes which doe turne these fruites and are called Cloues because in forme and shape they doe resemble a Birdes clawes They growe like the Mirtle-tree vpon the vttermost branches Cloues are much vsed both in meate and in medicines The people of Iaua desire the gray Cloues that hang a whole yere and more vpon the trees and are no Males as Auia doth absurdly aduise and as we of the common sort doe who couet the thinnest When they are greene they vse to salt them with salt and Vineger in Maluco and some they put in Suger which are verie pleasant to bee eaten The water of greene Cloues distilled is very pleasant of smel and strengthneth the hart likewise they procure sweating in men that haue the Pox with Cloues Nutmegges Mace long and black Pepper some lay the poulder of Cloues vpon a mans head that hath a paine in it that proceedeth of colde They strengthen the Liuer the Maw and the hart they further digestion they procure euacuation of the Vrine and stop lascatiuenes and being put into the eyes preserueth the sight and foure Drammes being drunke with Milke doe procure lust The 66 Chapter Of Mace Folie or flowers of Nutmegges and of Nutmegges THe Nutmegge trée is like a Peare tree or a Peach trée but that they are lesse and it hath round leaues These trées growe in the Iland of Banda not farre from Maluco and also in the Ilandes of Iauas Sunda from whence they are carried to China and Malacca and also into India and other places The fruite is altogether like great round Peaches the inward part whereof is the Nutmegge This hath about it a hard shell like wood wherein the Nut lyeth loose and this wooden shel or huske is couered ouer with Nutmeg flower which is called Mace and ouer it is the fruite which without is like the fruite of a Peach When it is ripe it is a verie costly meate and of a most pleasaunt sauor This fruite or Apples are many times conserued in Sugar being whole and in that sort caried throughout India and much estéemed for in truth it is the best conserue in all India and is many times brought ouer into Portingall and from thence hether They are likewise salted and put in Vineger which is much vsed in India When the Nuttes begin to be ripe then they swell and the first shell or huske bursteth in péeces and the Nutmegge flowers doe continue redde as any Scarlet which is a verie faire sight to behold especially if the trées bee full of fruite Sometimes also the Mace breaketh which is the cause that the Nutmegges come all together without the Mace and when the Nutmegge drieth then the Mace falleth off and the red changeth into Orenge colour as you sée by the Mace that is brought hether The Ilands where they grow specially Banda are very vnholesome countries as also the Ilands of Maluco many that traffique thether die before they depart from thence or if they escape they are in great perill of their liues by sicknesse notwith standing great gaine maketh men to trauell thether The Nutmegge by the inhabitants of Banda where they are most growing is called Palla and the Mace or Nutmegge flower Buna Palla The Decanijns and Indians call it Iapatry and the Mace Iayfol The trees whereon Nutmegs and Mace do grow are not vnlike to Peare trees but shorter and rounder leaues they are good for paine in the head for the mother and the Sinewes The Nut is compassed about with three kinds of Barkes The first outermost is like the greene shell of an Acorne and when they are ripe that shel openeth then you find a thin shell or barke like a Nutte which compasseth the fruite and by vs is called Mace which both in meate and Medicine is verie seruiceable and wholesome The third shell is harder and more
the fayrest workemanshippe thereof commeth from China as it may be séene by all things that come from thence as desks Targets Tables Cubbordes Bores and a thousand such like thinges that are all couered and wrought with Lac of all colours and fashions so that it maketh men to wonder at the beautie and brightnes of the colour which is altogether Lac they likewise vse Lac to fill their Golde and Siluer workes that is to say haftâ—s of kniues and other thinges which they make very fayre outwardly of Siluer and inwardly full of Lac. The Indians likewise are so cunning that they make Ringes of Gold which to mans sight séeme very fayre and bright as though they were all of massy Gold inwardly they are hollow and stopt with Lac and cannot bee perceyued vnlesse a man bee aduertised thereof There is Lac likewise in Ballagaâ—te and Malabar but very little the greatest quantitie which from thence is carryed throughout India and all other places commeth out of the kingdome of Pegu. The 69. Chapter Of Annil or Indigo ANnil or Indigo by the Gusurates is called Gali by others Nil it is a costly colour and much caryed and trafiqued into Portingall it groweth in India in the kingdom of Cambaia the hearbe is very like Rosemary and is sowed like other Hearbes and when time and season serueth pulled and dryed and then it is made wette and beaten and so certayne dayes after dryed againe and then prepared At the first it is a fine greene but after it is a fayre blew as you sée it when it commeth hether and the cleaner it is from earth and dust the better it is to proue if it be good they burne it with a candle and if then it fall out like fine meale it is good but if it be grosse like sande it is not good also being throwne into the water if it swimmeth it is good but if it sinke it is not good this Annil was more accounted of and commonly more worth then Cloues both in India and in Portingall the King not long since hath farmed it out so that no man may buy it in India nor bring it into Portingall but onely the Farmers as they do with Pepper Annil or Nil as the learned Doctor Camerarius witnesseth which hath had some of the plantes within his garden hath skyâ—coloured leaues being like to the leaues of the Hearbe which in Latine is called Barba Iouis in Dutch Donder baert but somewhat broâ—der The 70. Chapter Of Amber Muske Algallia or Ciuet. AMber by some men is thought to be the fome of a Whale fishe others thinke it to bee the filth and dung of the Whale and others a certain kind of Betumen which floweth out of a well that standeth on the sea side and casteth y e Amber vp but it is to bee thought that it is neyther of the first two for if it were men shoulde continually finde Amber in these Countries spocially on the coast of Biscay where so many Whales are taken yet is theâ—e no Amber found in that place it were rather to bee beléeued that it is a Betumen or pitch proceeding out of some fountaine or Well or some thing that floweth from the bottome of the Sea so driueth vpon the water because it is found in some places and in some places not where it is most found and from whence it dayly commeth is from the coast of Soâ—la Mosambique and on the coast of Meâ—de or Abeâ— It is likewise sometimes found by the Islandes of Maâ—diua and the câ—pe de Comorijn but not much and not so commonly as by Soâ—la and Mosambique There are others that thinke it to be a spungie earth of some vnknowne Island drought or hiddeÌ„ cliffes and by force of the sea in time broken off by peeces and cast vpon the shore like driftes or such like thinges for it is often times found floating and driuing in peeces of ten or twelue and some of fifty or sixtie pannes broad They say that in India there hath bin found whole Islandes of Amber which being well marked by those that found and discouered them whereby to come thether againe and lade thereof when they came to the same place they could not finde them In Anno 1555. there was a péece found not far from the cape de Comoâ—iin that weighed 30. quintales and he that found it thought it to be pitch whereupon he sold it for a small price but afterwardes being knowne it was greatly esteemed likewise oftentimes there commeth Amber that is mingled with shels and all spotted with the dung of Sea foules that sit theron There is Amber of a gray colour with whitish vaines that is the best it is called Amber Griis There is a kinde of Amber which is perfect blacke but not so much esteemed as the gray to prooue if the Amber be good they thrust pinnes into it and that which yeeldeth most oyle is the best It is much vsed among the Indian Noble men and kinges in their daylie meates they vse it likewise much to prouoke lust and to increase nature thereby to bee the more apt for the same as also in many faire workes with muske Ciuet Bemoin and other sweete thinges mixed together whereof they make fine apples and peares wrought about with siluer gold which they beare in their hands to smell vppon and in haftes of kniues handles of pomyards and such like which they make of siluer and Amber within theÌ„ which in diuers places shineth through them These and such like workes are very common in India among the rich and mightie men of the countrie as well Indians as Portingales Ambarium in Latine Ambar in Arabia is a kind of pitch as the Author very well affirmeth cast vp out of some fountaine that standeth in the bottome of the sea which being set in the Sunne doth presently become hard like other thinges that are also taken out of the sea as Corall c. This Ambar by reason of the sweet pleasant smell doth comfort the head and the heart and by the drynes thereof it draweth away consumeth all watery humors out of the stomacke and good against all filthie and foulenesse in a mans body It cureth such as haue the falling sicknes It is good against the rising of the Mother being receiued in and thrust vp into the body to conclude it is good for all old men and for euery cold complection The Almiscaâ— Mosseliat or Muskcat coÌ„meth from China They are beastes like Fores or little Dogs which being killed and beaten and brused they let them lie and rot blood and flesh together which done they cut them in péeces both skinne flesh and blood all mixed togeather and therof make diuers purses which they sowe in a round forme and are in that sort caried abroad sold to diuers men Those purses are coÌ„monly of an ounce waight the péece and by the Portingales are called Papos but the right Papos and perfect
will be as fresh and liuely as if they neuer had béene sicke hauing vsed this rule aforesaid And although the roote China being sodden in the water causeth a great appetite and a hungry stomacke neuerthelesse they must in any sorte beware that they eate but little and with measure that according to the rule prescribed for if they break it but one day nay but one houre all their labour were lost and so they must be forced to begin their diet again It must likewise bee vnderstood that the older and longer of continuance the pockes are so much the sooner will the roote heale them as also the older the persons to be healed are of yeares because that then the humors are not so ripe as in young yeares When the 3â— dayes are expired they must beware of drinking other drinke and to that end they must keepe the peeces and slices that were cut and sodden as before euery ounce by it selfe and therof take euery day a heape of the same roote so sodden and seeth them againe in a pot with as much water as they shall need to drinke but this seething need not to be done as the first seething with consumption of the water but only let it seeth vp once and no more This water must they drinke in this sorte for the space of 2â— or 30. dayes more and beware of fish or any goose or heauie meates as Oxe Cow or Hogges flesh and such like as also they must keepe themselues from much aire or winde whereby their bodies beeing healed may returne to their perfect healthes againe and after these twenty or thirty dayes are full expired then they must begin to vse all kinde of meates and drinkes although when the first thirtie dayes are out they may well goe abroad so they bee carefull of themselues and they shall not neede to sweate any more after the said first thirty dayes also it must bee remembred that such as meane to take this diet for their healthes it will bee good before they vse it to take a good purgation when the first fifteene dayes are out then take a second and so at the end of the thirtie day anâ— other whereby it will worke with more effect and with Gods help they shall be as lustie and sound as euer they were as it hath beene prooued by many thousandes in India This roote is not onely good for the Pockes and Piles but also for crampes and palsies and all cold diseases as for lumites that are stiffe and benummed with cold for the Gout for the Emperour Charles the fift himselfe did vse the same and found that it did him good But it must bee vnderstood that it is not good to vse it at all times of the yeare for in the dogge dayes and also in Summer by reason of the heat it is not good neyther in winter because of the cold but it is best to be vsed in Lent and Haruest time for then it is most temperate weather yet alwaies with the counsell of the learned Phisition the better to know the disposition complection inclination and age of the persons together with the time of the yeare the situation and climate of the countrie The manner of healing aforesaid is as it is vsed in India but in China which is a colder countrey and almost vnder the same degrees that these Countries are vnder they vse to seeth the water stronger for there they put 2 ounces or an ounce and a halfe of the wood into so much water and let it seeth vntill the water be two partes consumed which in India will not bee borne because of the great heate It is likewise to be vnderstood that the person and the disease of the person must be well considered for that if the sicknes bee not very great they must take lesse roote and let lesse water consume in the seething the younger persons also must haue stronger drinke then old â—olkes because they haue more humors in their bodies And yee must consider that hee which will take or vse this roote or the water thereof not beeing sicke it will waste and consume his flesh and good blood and doe himselfe great hurt wherfore good counsell and aduise must alwaies be taken before it be vsed and also iâ— it bee taken too hotte and too much it burneth both the liuer and the lunges and will fill the body full of pyles scurffe and maâ—gâ—es with other such like diseases whereby a man shall haue worke enough to driue those new diseases out of his body and fall out of one sicknes into another rather become worse then hee was at the first This I thought good in briefe to shew you thereby to teach such as knowe it not the true vse of his roote if it bee done in time when neede requireth for that many doe spende their wealthes and which is more are all their liues long out of hope for eâ—er to recouer their healthes againe vpon a disease which with so little cost is so easilie to be cured The summe of the foresaid water is likewise good against all scabbes and swellinges of the said Mâ— Neapo◠〈◊〉 or y e French pockes the best rootes are the blackest with few knots and white within for the reddish are not so good the wood or trée wherof it groweth is like a Haw-thorne straight and about three or foure spannes high the roote thereof is called the wood of China or Pockewood when they are gréene they eate them raw and being sodden they taste almost like suger canes but not so sweet The tree hath but few leaues but they are almost like the leaues of a young Orange tree These plants or trees in China are called Lampaton as the Chinos themselues doe say This shall suffice for this root of China so called because it is found in no place but in China what is more to be said of it I leaue vnto the learned Phisitions others that deale withall and haue better experience thereof The roote of China is commonlie vsed among the Egyptians not onelie for the pockes but for many other diseases specially for a consumption for the which they seeth the roote China in broth of a henne or cocke whereby they become whole and faire of face This roote drieth much and cooleth sweate it resisteth euill humors and strengthneth the liuer it healeth watery and filthie Vlcers and scurffes Leprie Is is good for a man that hath the pockes and for those that are dried vp and medicinable against a hard and a great milt The 78. Chapter Of Amsion alias Opium AMsion so called by the Portingales is by the Arabians Mores and Indians called Affion in latine Opio or opium It commeth out of Cairo in Egypt and out of Aden vpon the coast of Arabia which is the point of the land entring into the red Sea sometimes belonging to the Portingales but most part out of Cambaia from Decan that of Caâ—o is whitish and
is called Mece◠that of Aden and the places bordering vpon the mouth of the red sea is blackish hard That which commeth from Cambaia and Decan is softer and reddish Amfion is made of sleepe balles or Poppie and is the gumme which commeth forth of the same to y e which end it is cut vp and opened The Indians vse much to eat Amsion specially the Malabares and thether it is brought by those of Cambaia and other places in great aboundance Hee that vseth to eate it must eate it daylie otherwise he dieth and consumeth himselfe when they begin to eate it and are vsed vnto it they heate at the least twenty or thirty graines in waight euerie day sometimes more but if for foure or fiue dayes hee chanceth to leaue it he dieth without faile likewise he that hath neuer eaten it and will venture at the first to eate as much as those that dayly vse it it will surely kill him for I certainely beleeue it is a kinde of poyson Such as vse it goe alwaies as if they were halfe a sleepe they eate much of it because they would not feele any great labour or vnquietnes when they are at worke but they vse it most for lecherie for it maketh a man to hold his féede long before he sheddeth it which the Indian women much desire that they may shed their nature likewise with the man although such as eate much thereof are in time altogether vnable to company with a woman whollie dried vp for it drieth and wholly cooleth mans nature that vseth it as the Indians themselues doe witnes wherefore it is not much vsed by the Nobilitie but onely for the cause aforesaid Opium is the iuice of blacke Poppie and is of two sortes one sweet beeing pressed out of the leaues and heads together which the Greekes call Meconium the other floweth or commeth out of the heads being cut which is the right Opium That which is heauy close fast and bitter in taste that which with the smell of it prouoketh sleepe that which easily melteth in the water and is soft white and without grossenes or kernels is the best Opium and is by the Turkes called Maslac They eate thereof daylie the quantitie of a pease not thereby to prouoke sleepe but to giue them courage specially when they goe to war thinking that thereby they are made more couragious and that when they sleepe they dreame that they see many pleasant places and are in company of diuers goodly womē althogh it is commonly seene that such is dayly vse Opium are very still and sleepie and very slow both in wordes and workes so that men know not how to deale with them The 79. Chapter Of Bangue BAngue is also a common meate in India seruing to the same effect that Amsion doth It is a séed like Hempséede but somwhat smaller and not so white Also the thing whereon it groweth is like Hempe but it hath no substance wherof to make any thing The Indians eate this séede or the leaues thereof being stamped saying that it maketh a good appetite but vseth most to prouoke lust as it is commonly vsed and sold in the shops it is mingled with some poulder of the leaues and the séede together They likewise put gréene Arecca vnto it therewith to make a man drunke or in a manner out of his wits Sometimes also they mixe it with Nutmegs and Mace which doth also make a man drunke Others that is to saye the rich and welthy persons mix it with Cloues Camphora Ambar Muske and Opium which as the Moores likewise affirme maketh a man pleasant and forgetting himselfe performing all kind of labour and toyle without once thinking of any paine but onely laughing playing and sleeping quietly The common women or whores vse it when they meane to haue a mans companie thereby to be liuely and merrie and to set all care aside It was first inuented by Captaines and souldiers when they had layne long in the field continually waking and with great trauell which they desiring to remedie and againe to comfort themselues thereby to settle their braines doe vse Bangue in such manner as is aforesaid It causeth such as eate it to réele and looke as if they were drunke and halfe foolish doing nothing but laugh and bee merrie as long as it worketh in their bodies It is verie much vsed by the Indians and likewise by some Portingales but most by the slaues thereby to forget their labour to conclude it is a certaine small comfort to a melancholy person Bangue is likewise much vsed in Turkie and Aegypt and is made in three sorts hauing also three seuerall names The first by the Aegyptians is called Assis which is the poulder of Hemp or of Hemp leaues which water made in paste or dough wherof they eate fiue peeces each as bigge as a Chesnut and some more such as eate it for an hower after are as if they were drunke without sence and as it were besides themselues thinking they see many strange sights wherein they are much pleased This is vsed by the common people because it is of a small price and it is no wonder that such vertue proceedeth from the Hempe for that according to Galens opinion Hempe excessiuely filleth the head The second they name Bosa which is stronger then Assis It is made of the meale of Lolium by vs called Dronkaydes weede or Hearbe and of Hempseede with water as aforesaid others presse out the iuice and eat that The thirde is called Bernaui which is the right Bangue which they haue readie dressed out of India as Hughen writeth wherof they take about an ounce at the first are merie talking much singing plesant songs laughing without measure and vsing many foolish toyes which continueth with them almost an hower After that they are in a manner furious giuen to chiding and fighting which continueth likewise a little space that done they are possessed with heauinesse and a certaine kind of feare that many times they crie out In the end whē they haue played al these parts they fall in a sleepe and being awaked they are as they were at the first This is much vsed by foolish Iesters or Iuglers at feasts and banquets to delight them The Aegyptians vse also an other sorte called Bers that is to say health for an hower It is made of white Pepper white Bilzen seede of each fiue ounces and of Opium two ounces and a halfe Spica Nardi Euphorbium Bertram of each one Mitchell Saffran fifteene Scruples all beaten in a Marble morter and mixed with Honnie wherof they make a confection The 80. Chapter Of Camphora THere are two sortes of Camphora one of Borneo which is the best the other of China or Chincheu which is nothing so good it groweth on trées as great as Nutte trées and is the gumme which is within the middle of the tree and by sweating and dropping commeth out from the same This Camphora of
Borneo is likewise in the Iland of Sumatra and Sunda as also in some other places there abouts It is of bignesse like a seede called in Portingall Mâ—lho and with vs Barley of colour whitish It is of foure sorts whereunto the Indians vse certaine Siues with holes purposely made in them the first hauing smal holes and that which passeth through them is the worst the next following it is somewhat greater and so forth after that rate as it is said before of Pearles and so it is prised accordingly It commeth sometimes all spotted with some filth or foulenesse which the Bamaners of Cambaia know well how to wash away with water Sope and the iuice of Lemons which done they set it to drie in some shadow place wherby it is whiter then it was at the first and keepeth the former waight It is likewise falsified with other Gum or poulder of other rootes as the Indians can well handle all their wares This is the right and true Camphora of Borneo yet I belieue there commeth verie little of it into these countries but the Camphora of Chyna which commeth from Chincheu is in great aboundance and is brought in cakes or balles and is much carried into al places and verie good cheape For one pound of Borneo is worth a hundred pound of Chincheu although the Champhora of Chincheu is mixed with Champhora of Borneo and they know how to giue it a colour in such sorte that it is both taken and vsed for good and because it is so much vsed in medicines I haue particularly set it downe in this place as also because it is one of the principallest wares in India The 81. Chapter Of Tamarinio TAmarinio groweth in the most parts of all India speciallie in the land of Gusâ—ate and the North parts beyond Goa the Malabares call it Pulu the Gusurates and the other Indians cal it Anbilii the Arabians Tamarindii because Tamaras in Arabia are the same that with vs we cal Dates and because they know not what to liken Tamarinio vnto better then vnto Dates therefore they call it Tamarindi y t is Tamaras or Dates of India wherevpon the Portingales cal it also Tamarinio and the Dates which are in great abundance brought out of Persia Arabia into India they name them after the Arabians Tamaras The trees of Tamarinio are almost like vnto Chesnuts or other nut trees the branches being full of leaues with a close strong wood the fruite of the Tamarinio is about a finger long bowing or crooked hauing greene shelles or pilles without and béeing drie are grayish hauing within certaine kernels of the greatnes of a Beane which are couered about with that which they call Tamarinio it sticketh to mens hands for it is like lime therewith they prepare all their compositions throughout India for it hath a sowrish and sharp taste and is the best sauce in all India like vergis with vs and they neuer sieth Rice but they put Tamarinio into it wherewith their composition called Cariil is made as in many places it is alreadie declared yet those that see it drest will haue no great desire to eate it for they crush it through their fingers whereby it sheweth like rotten Medlers yet it giueth the Rice the meate a fine sharp taste Tamarinio is likewise proued to be a very good purgation for the poore that are of smal habilitie and are not able to be at charges of Rhabarbo Mannâ— and such like costlie Apothecaries ware doe onlie vse Tamarinio pressed out into a little water which water being drunk fasting in a morning is the best purgation in the world which is to be done when the Tamarinio is ripe or when it is greene it is vsed likewise in dressing meate to put in among their flesh in steed of Vineger for it is much sowrer then Vineger much like gréen gooseberries or grapes the Physitians vse it in purgations medecines coÌ„pouÌ„ded with other herbes and spices and it worketh well it is likewise salted to send for Portingal Arabia Persia other places yet the Indians kéepe it in their houses in the huskes as it commeth from the tree and it haÌ„geth on the trées like sheathes of kniues but that they are somewhat bowed as I said before there is likewise sugar coÌ„serues made therof which is verie good The nature of this tree is to be wondered at for that the Tamariniâ— that is to say the long crooked huske wherein it is in the night time shrinketh it self vp vnder the leaues to couer it from the cold of the night and in the day time it vncouereth it self again all naked and outright as I haue often séene and beheld it when it is caryed abroad or sold it is out of the shelles or huskes and béeing put together they make balles thereof as bigge as a mans fist but it is clammie and sticketh together It is not very pleasant to looke on nor yet to handle but verie good cheap throughout all India by reason of the great quanttitie thereof Tamarinde is by the Aegyptians called Derelside The tree wheron it groweth is as great as a Plumme tree with thicke branches and leaues like a Mirtle The flowers white like Orange flowers from the middle whereof do proceede fower white thinne threeds which growe out of the huske wherein the seede and the pith is which wee call Tamarindi The leaues of the tree doe alwaies turne towards the Sunne and when it goeth downe they shut together and couer the huske in the night time At Alcayro in their gardens I saw some of these trees and one by Saint Macarius Cloyster in the wildernesse where no other Hearbs nor trees doe grow The Turkes and Egyptians vse this Tamarinde much in hotte diseases and Feauers they put it into faire water and so drinke it I healed my selfe therewith of a pestilent Feuer being in Siria It is a common Medecine among them which as they trauel through the drie woods and wildernesse they doe vse and also against the Plague and other hot diseases proceeding of Cholericke burning humors and against the heate of the Liuer and Kidneyes it is verie good I can shewe the whole huske or shell of the Tamarinde with the leaues as they grow and the Canna Fistula which I my selfe gathered in Egypt The leaues of Tamarinde trees are vsed against Wormes in childrens bellies and the young huskes as also the Cassia Fistula are in Egypt vsed to be conserued in Honnie oâ— Saint Iohns bread or Suger whereof I brought great Pots full ouer The Canna Fistula which is likewise much vsed for Purgations and other such like Medicines is much found in India as also in Cambaia Sion Malacca and the places bordering on the same but because there is the like in the Spanish Indies and many other places and sufficiently knowne I will speake no more of it but follow on with matters of lesse knowledge Of these trees I haue seene in Egypt at the least thousands
together specially about Damiata a famous towne in Egypt lying on the ryuer Nilus euen in like sort as the towne of Campen lyeth vppon Issel about a mile from the Sea The Egyptians call it Cassia Chaiarx-Ambar The trees whereon Cassia groweth are altogether like our Wallnut trees both for body branches and leaues only the flowers are Golde-yellow and of a sweete sauor out of these groweth the great huskes wherein the Cassia lyeth The huskes being small and without any woode are conserued likewise The Egyptians vse the huske of Cassia with white Suger the iuice of Calissi-wood against grauell and all diseases of the bladder and the Kidnies also against coughing and stopping of the brest with Agaricum also outwardly against hotte inflamations laying the Cassia vpon them Hee that desireth to know more hereof let him reade Mathiolus and other Physitions that haue written most diligently vpon the same The 82. Chapter Of Mirabolanes THe Myrobalanes are found in many places of India that is in Cambaia in the land of Baâ—gate in Goâ— in Malabar and in Bengalen whereof there are fiue sortes The first by Physitions called Citrinos and by the Indians Araâ—e those are round and are vsed to purge choller The second which are called Emblicos and in India Amuale are vsed in India to tanne Leather withall as Tanners vse Sumach and when they are ripe and also gréene they eate them for an appetite The third sort in India called Resonualle and by the Physitions Indius are eight cornered The fourth by the Physitions called Bellericos and by the Indians Guâ—ij are also round The fift last are in India called Aretean by the Physitions Quebulus those are somwhat long roundish with points The trées are almost like Plumme trees but they haue seuerall sorts of leaues each tree by himselfe They are commonly one with the other in greatnesse and fashion like Plummes but that some of them are squarer and rounder as I said before Thrée sorts are onely vsed and estéemed of by the Physitions in India that is Quebulus which grow in Cambaia Bisnagar and Bengala which are likewise preserued eaten in that sort as also carried into diuers places as well to Portingall as else where likewise the Cetrinos and Indius which also are preserued and they grow in Malabar Batecala and Bengala they are much vsed estéemed and carried into other countries The Mirabolans when they are ripe are almost in taste like vnripe Plummes but because this matter concerneth Physitions Apoticaries I will speake no more thereof hauing onely set it downe for a common thing in India All these fiue sorts of Mirabolanes are brought vs hether out of India ready dried and some conserued in pickle others in Suger The first wee call Citrinas or Flauas which are yellow Mirabolans and the yellower the better shewing some thing greene close and fast and gummie with a thicke shell They purge the stomake from choller and are good against Tertians and other hotte burning Feauers and verie necessarie for a hotte nature The second wee call Indus these the blacker they are the better they purge choller specially black choller they are good against shaking of the limmes they cause a faire colour and driue away sadnesse The third is called Cepule or Chebulae the greater they are the better blackish and somewhat reddish heauie and sinking in the water they purge fleame they sharpen mens wits and cleare the sight They are here preserued in Suger and Honnie they doe strengthen and purge the stomak they heale the dropsie and are good against olde Agues they likewise giue a man an appetite and helpe digestion The fourth wee call Emblicas and the fift Bellericas they haue in a manner one kinde of operation like the other called Cebulus They cleanse the body from fleagme specially the braines the Kidnies and the stomake they strengthen the hart giue an appetite and ease belching The Emblice are also conserued eaten to the same ende All these fruites purge but in an other kinde of manner then doth Cassia or Manna or such like drugges but they do it by astriction or binding thrusting that out which is in the members They that desire to knowe more hereof let him reade Mathiolus and Garcius ab Horto and others The 83. Chapter Of other Spices and Hearbes in India SPiconardus groweth in the countries of Sitor Mandoâ— which are places that border vppon the lands of Decan Dely and Bengalen it is sowed and groweth on plants about 2 or 3. spâ—ns high like corne with great veines wherein the Spiconardus groweth They doe commonly come close out of the earth by the roote and by that sort are brought into Cambaia and other places to sell and from thence sent into all places The Indian Spica comforteth the mawe being taken inwardly and also outwardly applyed and consumeth cold humors Aloe by the Arabians called Sebar by the Decaners Area by the Canarijns Cate Comer and by the Portingales Azeure is made of the Iuyce of an Hearbe when it is dried the Herbe is called by the Portingales Herba Baboza that is Quil hearbe There is much of it in Cambaia Bengala and other places but in the Iland called Sacotora which lyeth on the mouth of the redde Sea or the strength of Mecca there is great quantitie and the best It is a marchandise that is carried into Turkie Persia Arabia and also into Europe whereby the Iland is much esteemed and the Aloes called after the name of the Iland Aloes Socotrino or Aloes of Sacotora Aloes purgeth the stomacke from choler and tough fleagme specially a watrie and weake stomake it taketh away all stopping and consumeth rawe moystures preseruing it from foulenesse besides this it strengthneth the stomake it is made stronger of more force by adding to it Cinamon Mace or Nutmegges Aloes is good specially against Kooren and rawnesse and for such persons as haue their stomakes ful of raw moysture it is also vsed outwardly against sores that breake forth of the body and for the eyes The fruite called Anacardi is in manye places of India as in Cananor Calecut and the countrie of Decan and in diuers other places The Arabians call it Balador the Indians Bibo and the Portingall Faua de Malacca that is Beanes of Malacca because it is like a beane but somwhat greater then the Beanes of these countries they are vsed in India with milke against a short breath for the Wormes and for many other things When they are greene they make Achar thereof that is to say they salt them and lay them in Vineger as they do with the most kind of fruites and Spices as in diuers places I haue shewed This fruite hath her name from the hart because in colour and likenesse it resembleth the heart specially beeing drie When the fruites are greene and hanging on the tree as I haue seene theÌ„ in Sicilia vpon mount Aethna they are like great Beanes
greater it is nothing worth and being lesse it will soone be perceyued by the which thicknesse although it standeth in a ring they can both sée and gesse how much it weighth within a little more or lesse and being out of the ring it is weyghed thereby to value it truely there are olde and ancient records found in India wherein are written the prices of the stones that is one Quilat for so much two Quilates for so much and thrée Quilates for so much after the rate c. and so of all prices and weights accordingly and because they are dayly bought and solde it is therefore néedefull for a man to haue a memoriall about him that is of the prices of the perfect and fayre stones without fault or spot for that being vncleane or hauing any fault or spot they are hardly to be valued There are some Princes and great Lordes that desire to know the cause why such precicious stones are holden at so great prices wherevnto no other answere is made but because men buy and sell them so deare for all thinges are estéemed no otherwise of then because they are bought and sold at such pryces and so is their manner to sell for if a Diamant of one Quilat alone bee worth fiftie Duckets being perfect their reason is that after the same rate a great stone or Diamant may be worth 30. or 40. thousand Duckets being in greatnesse and perfection correspondent and the stones as well great as little that vntill this time haue béene bought and solde haue not béene so light that they were sold aboue or vnder their value and estimation Now to value the great Diamant as it ought to be it is necessarie to know and determine what a Diamant of a Quilat is worth and a Rubie to match therewith the like of an Emerald neyther more nor lesse hauing well considered what or how much hinderance the falts and foulenesse of the saide Diamant will be vnto the sale thereof deducting the same out of the price of the said Diamant Rubie or Emerald being Orientall of what greatnesse soeuer they bee you may value them and I will first beginne with the Diamant for that other stones are valued after the rate thereof and wil declare the perfection which it ought to haue The diamant y t is perfect in all respects must be of that proportion that the two squares on the sides must make the breadth of the vpper parte of the stone and that the vnder part of the stone be no broader then that thrée of the breadths thereof will make the breadth of the vpper part and déepe according to the same proportion and the squares on the side must stande close with the edge of the ring or thing wherin it is set being of the whole depth and somewhat longer then square and yet no more then that it may be gessed which is the length and breadth thereof also it must bee without any falts both in corners and sides and euery one of the foure corners sharpe and cleane cut and of a good water Christaline shining cleare so that it may not once be perceiued that it draweth neere any colour and not of a darke water but cleare and cleane the Diamant with all these perfections is worth 50. duckets being of one Quilat but because these perfections are not often found and that few men vnderstand them therefore I will say that a Diamant of goodnesse and perfection according to the common estimation being of the waight of one Quilat in worth 40. duckets and after this rate wee will make our account and whether it bee a small or great Diamant of what wayght goodnes or foulenesse soeuer it may bee you must first consider know what it waigheth if they cannot tell you theÌ„ you must gesse by the sight thereof and alwayes estéeme it at lesse wayght then you think it weigheth that you may value it within the price and hauing estéemed the waight kéepe that in your memorie and say thus if it were a Diamant of a Quilat waight of this water and so perfect or had the corners lesse then these or any foulenesse in respect of this and all the qualities or faultes which a Diamant ought to haue consider what such a Diamant may be worth being of qualitie like that you will estéeme weighing no more but one Quilat which hauing wel thought and considered vpon estéeme it rather lesse then more hold y e price in your memory as aforesaid and thinke vppon the waight that it should weigh be it much or little double the same waight adding as much more vnto it as if it bee two take other two and multiply them together and say 2. times 2. is foure if it weygh 3. multiply it with thrée and they make 9. and so according to the number you find and so you shall multiply all Diamonds in waight of what wayght soeuer they be and multiply them as I said before with as much againe as they bee esteemed and the production of your multiplication you shall multiply by the summe of money you value the Diamant to bee worth weyghing one Quilate and the production of the last multiplication is the value of the Diamant if in the waight there be any halfes as if it wayghed 2â— Quilate then you shall redeeme them into halfe Quilates which is 5. halfe Quilates and then say 5. times 5. is 25. and that shall you multiply with the price of the halfe Quilate as you esteeme it and the production thereof is the worth of such a Diamant and if it chance y t the Diamant were so smal that the waight of a graine should be therein esteemed then you must reduce all the waight into graines and multiply as aforesaid and that which proceedeth thereof is the waight of such a Diamant as you seeke to value or estéeme As for example there is a Diamant that waigheth 2. Quilates which is of such a qualitie that being of one Quilate it would be worth â—0 Duckets and being of halfe a Quilate 10. Duckets and being of a graine 2. Duckets and a halfe Now to know what this Diamant of 2. Quilates is worth you shall say that 2. times 2. is 4. This 4. you shal multiply with 40. Duckets which is the value thereof being of one Quilate it maketh 160. Duckets which is the price of that Diamant of two Quilates now that you haue a Diamant of two Quilates and a halfe which is fiue halfes you shall say fiue times fiue is 25. this 25. multiplyed by 10. it maketh 250. duckets because the halfe Quilate cost 10. duckets which is after the rate of 40. duckets the Quilate then the Diamant of 2. Quilates and a halfe amounteth to 250. duckets Now if a Diamant weighed 7. graines you shall say 7. times 7. is 49. which 49. you must multiply by the value of a graine which is two duckets and a halfe so a Diamant of 7. graines is 127.
parts with a very good table and were to bee compared with a Diamond of one Quilate it would bee worth 40. duckets but hauing any imperfections euery maÌ„ may well consider what hurt and abate they may doe in the price and after the same rate make his account as hee doth in Rubies the Ballayeses are likewise sold by waight but not in that sort as Diamonds and Rubies but they are estéemed according to the waight that is the best â—layes that may be found being of one Quilate may be worth ten duckets and hauing any faults eyther in colour or other perfections is of lesse valew but beeing perfect as I said alreadie it is worth ten duckets and two Quilates twentie duckets of three Quilates thirtie duckets and so after the rate as it is small or great being of the waight it should bee and beeing imperfect euery man ofskill may well consider what it is worth being of one Quilate estéeme it thereafter The 91. Chapter Of Orientale Pearles THe Orientale Pearles are better then those of the Spanish Indies and haue great difference in the price for they are worth more and haue a better glasse being clearer and fairer Those of the Spanish Indies commonly beeing darker deader of colour yet there are some found in the Portingall Indies that are nothing inferiour to the Orientale Pearles but they are very few Now to valew them as they shuld be I wil only set the good Pearles at a price A Pearle that in all partes is perfect both of water glasse and beautie without knobs of forme very rouÌ„d or proportioned like a pearle without dents being of one Quilate is worth a ducket and after this rate I will make my reckoning as I doe with Diamonds Rubies and Emeraulds and if there be any faults in the water clearenes and fashion or that it hath any knobs or other defaults it may well be considered what hurt it may bee vnto the sale thereof and according to the goodnes or badnes valew the price therof which hauing valewed we must sée what it weigheth and then make the reckoning thereof as with Diamonds Rubies Emeraulds if there be a whole string or a chaine full of Pearles you must looke well vpon theÌ„ for where there are many they are not all alike the greatest beeing the best the other after the rate for the goodnes of the great wil beare the badnes of the smal but if it be contrary then the bargen is not very good This shall suffice for instruction to such as desire to deale therewith to haue alwaies in their memorie and what herein is wanting for the better vnderstanding and knowledge hereof it may be supplied by true Iewellers and stone cutters that are skilfull in this point and with these instructions can easily help so that a maÌ„ shall not need wholly to put his trust in those that for their owne profit will giue them but bad counsell therein The 92. Chapter Of â—rtaâ—ne â—emorable thinges passed in India during my residence there IN the month of December Anno 158â— there ariued in the towne and Island of Ormus foure EnglishmeÌ„ which came from Aleppo in the couÌ„trie of Suria hauing sayled out of England and passed through the straightes of Gibraltar to Tripoli a towne and Hauen lying on the sea coast of Suria where all the shippes discharge their wares and marchandises and frome thence are caryed by land vnto Alleppo which is nyne dayes iourney In Aleppo there are resident diuers marchants and Factors of all Nations as Italians Frenchemen EnglishmeÌ„ Armenians Turkes Mores euerie man hauing his Religion apart paying tribute vnto the great Turke In that towne there is great trafficke for that from thence euerie yeare twyse there trauelleth two Caâ—ylen that is companies of people and Camelles which trauell vnto India Persia Arabia and all the countries bordering on the same and deale in all sorts of marchandise both to and from those Countries as I in an other place haue alreadie declared Three of the said Englishmen aforesaide were sent by the Companie of Englishmen that are resident in Aleppo to see if in Ormus they might keepe any Factors and so trafficke in that place like as also the Italians doe that is to say the Venetians which in Ormus Goa and Malacca haue their Factors and trafficke there as well for stones and pearles as for other wares and spices of those countries which from thence are caryed ouer land into Veâ—e One of these Englishmen had beene 〈◊〉 before in the said towne of Ormus and there had taken good information of the trade and vpon his aduise and aduertisement the other were as then come thether with him bringing great store of marchandises with them as Clothes Saffron all kindes of drinking glasses and Haberdashers wares as looking glasses kniues and such like stuffe and to conclude brought with them all kinde of small wares that may be deuised And although those wares amounted vnto great summes of money notwithstaÌ„ding it was but onlie a shadow or colour thereby to giue no occasion to be mistrusted or seen into for that their principall intent was to buy great quantities of precious Stones as Diamantes Pearles Rubies c. to the which ende they brought with them a great summe of money and Gold and that verie secretly not to be deceyued or robbed thereof or to runne into anie danger for the same They being thus aryued in Ormus hyred a Shop and began to sell their wares which the Italians perceyuing whose Factors continue there as I sayd before and fearing that those Englishmen finding good vent for their commodities in that place wold be resident therein and so daylie increase which would be no small losse and hinderance vnto them did presently inuent all the subtile meanes they could to hinder them and to that end they went vnto the Captaine of Ormus as then called Don Gonsalo de Meneses telling him that there were certaine Englishmen come into Ormus that were sent only to spy the Country and said further that they were Heretickes and therefore they sayd it was conuenient they shuld not be suffered so to depart without béeing examined and punished as enimies to the example of others The Captaine being a friend vnto the Englishmen by reason that one of them which had bene there before had giuen him certaine presents would not be perswaded to trouble them but shipped them with all their wares in a Shippe that was to sayle for Goa and sent them to the Viceroy that he might examine and trye them as hee thought good where when they were aryued they were cast into prison and first examined whether they were good Christians or no and because they could speake but bad Portugale onlie two of them spake good Dutche as hauing bene certaine yeares in the lowe Countries and there traffiqued There was a Dutch Iesuite borne in the towne of Bâ—gges in Flaunders that had bin resident in the Indies for the space
is verie dangerous therefore it is good reason they should shunne them and surely the Pilots ought to haue great care specially such as are in the Indian ships for that the whole ship and safetie thereof lyeth in their hands and is onely ruled by them and that by expresse commaundement from the King so that no man may contrary them They being thus betwéene the lands and by all y e Saylors iudgements hard by the drowthes of India the Pilot tooke the height of the Sunne and made his account that they were past the shallowes commaunding the Master to make all the sayle hee could and freely to sayle to Mosambique without any let or stay And although there were diuers Saylors in the shippe that likewise had their Cardes some to learne other for their pleasures as diuers Officers the Master and the chiefe Boatwayne that said it was better to keepe alooffe specially by night and that it would be good to hold good watch for y t they found they had not as then past the shallowes yet the Pilot saide the contrary and would needes shew that he only had skill and power to commaunde as commonly the Portingales by pride do cast themselues away because they wil follow no mans counsell and be vnder no mans subiection specially when they haue authoritie as it happened to this Pilot that would heare no man speake nor tak◠my counsell but his owne therefore commaunded that they should doe as he appointed them whereupon they hoysted all their Sayles sayled in that sort till it was midnight both with good wind faire wether but the Moone not shining they fell full vpon the Shallowes being of cleare white Corall and so sharpe that with the force of wynd and water that draue the shippe vpon them it cut the shippe in two peeces as if it had beene sawed in sunder so that the keele and two Oarlops lay still vpon the ground and the vpper part being driuen somewhat further at the last stuck fast the maste beeing also broken wherewith you might haue heard so great a crie that all the aire did sound therewith for that in the shippe being Admiral there was at the least fyue hundreth persons among the wich were 30. women with manie Iesuites and Fryers so that as then there was nothing else to bee done but euery man to shrifte bidding each other farewel and asking al men forgiuenes with weeping and crying as it may well be thought The Admirall called Fernando de Mendosa the Maister the Pylot and ten or twelue more presentlie entred into the small boate keeping it with naked Rapiers that no more should enter saying they would goe see if there were anie drie place in the shallowes whereon they might worke to make a Boate of the peeces of the broken shippe therein to sayle vnto the shore and so to saue their liues wherewith they put them that were behind in some small comfort but not much But when they had rowed about and finding no drie place they durst not returne again vnto the Shippe least the boate would haue beene ouerladen and so drowned and in the Shippe they looked for no helpe wherefore in fyne they concluded to row to land hauing about 12 boxes of Marmalade with a pipe of wine and some Bisket which in hast they had thrown into the boat which they dealt among them as néed required and so commending themselues to God they rowed forwardes towards the coast and after they had béene 17 daies vpon the sea they fell with great hunger thirst and labor on the land where they saued themselues The rest that stayed in the ship séeing the boate came not againe it may wel be thought what case they were in At the last one side of the vpper part of the ship betwéene both the vpper Oarlops where the great boat lay burst out and the Boate being halfe burst began to come forth but because there was small hope to be had and fewe of them had little will to proue masteryes no man layd hand thereon but euerie man sate looking one vpon an other At the last an Italian called Cyprian Grimoaldo rose vp and taking courage vnto him sayd why are we thus abashed Let vs seeke to helpe our selues and see if there be any remedie to saue our liues wherewith presentlie he leapt into the boat with an instrument in his hand and began to make it cleane whereat some others began to take courage and to helpe him as well as they could with such things as first came to their handes so that in the end there leaped at the least foure score and ten persons into it and many hung by the handes vppon the boat swimming after it amōg the which were some women but because they would not sinke the boate they were forced to cut off the fingers handes and armes of such as held thereon and let them fall into the sea and manie they threw ouer bord being such as had not wherewith to defend themselues Which done they set forwards committing themselues to God with the greatest cry and pitifullest noyse that euer was heard as though heauen and earth had gone together when they tooke their leaue of such as stayed in the Shippe In which manner hauing rowed certaine dayes and hauing but small store of victuals for that they were so manie in the boate that it was readie to sinke it being likewise verie leake and not able to hold out in the ende they agreed among themselues to chuse a Captaine to whome they would obey and doe as he commanded and among the rest they chose a gentle man a Mestico of India and swore to obey him hee presentlie commanded to throwe some of them ouer bord such as at that tyme had least meanes or strength to helpe themselues among the which there was a Carpenter that had not long before holpen to dresse the Boate whoe seeing that the Lot fell vpon him desired them to giue him a peece of Marmalade and a Cuppe of wine which when they had done he willingly suffered himselfe to bee throwne ouer bord into the Sea and so was drowned There was an other of those that in Portingale are called New Christians he béeing allotted to be cast ouer bord into the Sea had a younger Brother in the same Boate that sodainelie rose vp and desired the Captaine that hee would pardon and make free his Brother and let him supplie his place saying My Brother is older and of better knowledge in the world then I and therefore more fit to liue in the world and to helpe my sisters and friendes in their need so that I had rather die for him then to liue without him At which request they let the elder Brother loose and threwe the younger at his owne request into the sea that swōme at the least sixe howers after the boate And although they held vp their hands with naked rapiers willing him that hee shuld not once come to touch the Boate
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
into the Iland as there doe and they may kill them with stones and staues by reason of the gret numbers of them Now for fruites as Portingall Figges Pomgranets Oranges Lemons Citrons and such like fruites there are so many that growe without planting or setting that all the valleyes are full of them which is a great pleasure to beholde so that it séemeth to bee an earthly Paradise It hath fruite all the yeare long because it raineth there by showers at the least fiue or six times euerie day and then againe the Sunne shineth so that whatsoeuer is planted there it groweth verie well but because the Portingales are not ouer curious of new things there groweth not of al sorts of fruites of Portingall and India in that Iland for assuredly without any doubt they would growe well in that land because of the good temperature of the ayre besides this they haue so great abundance of Fish round about the Iland that it séemeth a wonder wrought of God for with crooked nayles they may take as much Fish as they will so that all the shippes doe prouide themselues of Fish of all sorts in that place which is hanged vp and dried and is of as good a taste and sauor as any Fish that euer I eate and this euery man that hath beene there affirmeth to be true And the better to serue their turnes vpon the Rockes they find salt which serueth them for their necessarie prouisions so that to conclude it is an earthly Paradise for y e Portingall shippes and seemeth to haue been miraculously discouered for the refreshing and seruice of the same considering the smalnesse and highnesse of the land lying in the middle of the Ocean seas and so far from the firme land or any other Ilands that it séemeth to be a Boye placed in the midle of the Spanish Seas for if this Iland were not it were impossible for the shippes to make any good or prosperous Viage for it hath often fallen out that some shippes which haue missed thereof haue endured the greatest miserie in y e world and were forced to put into the coast of Guinea there to stay the falling of the raine and so to get fresh water and afterwardes came halfe dead and spoyled into Portingall It is the fashion that all the sicke persons that are in the shippes and can not wel sayle in them are left there in the Iland with some prouision of Rice Bisket Oyle and some Spices for Fish and flesh they may haue enough for when the ships are gone then all the beastes which by reason of the great number of people fly into the mountaines come downe againe into the valleyes where they may take them with their handes and kill them as they list those sicke men stay there till the next yeare till other ships come thether which take them with them they are commonly soone healed in that Iland as being a verie sound and pleasant countrie and it is verie seldome seene that any of them dyeth there because they haue alwaies a temperate ayre and coole winde and alwayes fruite throughout the whoâ—â— yeare The king will not suffer any man to dwell in it because they should not destroye spoyle the countrie and holde it as their owne but will haue it common for euerie man to take what he hath neede of In time past there dwelt an Hermet in the I le who continued there for certaine yeares vnder pretence of doing penance and to vphold the Church hee killed many of the Goates and Buckes so that euerie yeare hee sold at the least fiue or sixe hundred skinnes and made great profit therof which the King hearing caused him presently to bee brought from thence into Portingall Likewise vpon a certaine time two Caâ—â—ares or blacke people of Mosambique and one Iauer with two women slaues stoale out of the shippes and hid themselues in the Rockes of this Iland which are verie high and wilde whereby men can hardly passe them They liued there together and begot children so that in the ende they were at the least twentie persons who when the ships were gone ran throughout the Iland and did much hurt making their houses dweling places betweene some of the hilles where not any of the Portingales had beene nor yet could easily come at them and therein they hid themselues vntill the shippes were gone but in the end they were perceiued and the Portingales vsed all the meanes they could to take them but they knew so well how to hide and defend themselues that in many yeares they could not be taken in the end fearing that they might in time be hurtfull vnto them and hinder them much by expresse commaundement of the King after long and great labour they tooke them all and brought them prisoners into Portingall so that at this present no man dwelleth therein but onely the sicke men as I told you before When the ships come thether euerie man maketh his lodging vnder a trée setting a Tent about it for that the trees are there so thicke that it presently séemeth a little towne or an armie lying in the fielde Euerie man prouideth for himselfe both flesh fish fruite and woode for there is enough for them all and euerie one washeth Linnen There they hold a generall fasting and prayer with Masse euerie daye which is done with great deuotion with procession and thankesgiuing and other Himnes thanking God that hee hath preserued them from the danger of the Cape de Bona Speranza and brought them to that Iland in safetie There they vse oftentimes to Carus their names and markes in trees plants for a perpetuall memorie whereof many hundredth are there to be found which letters with the growing of the trées doe also grow bigger and bigger we found names that had been there since the yeare of the Lord 1510. 1515. and euerie yeare orderly following which names stoode vpon Figge trées euery letter being of the bignesse of a spanne by reason of the age and growing of the trées This shal suffice for the description of the Iland of Saint Helena The 21. of May being Saint Helenas day and Whitsunday after we had taken in all our fresh water and other necessaries we set sayle altogether in companie and directed Th◠〈…〉 Pâ—â—ntâ—d 〈◊〉 London by â—ohn Wolfe 〈◊〉 by William Rogers THE TRVE Description of the ISLAND of 〈◊〉 lyeiâ—g 〈◊〉 by â— degrees on y e Sâ—uth syde of y e Equinoctiall lyne Printed at London by Iohn Wolfe Gâ—â—uen by William Rogers our course towardes Portingall leauing about fiftéene sicke men in the Ilande some slaues that ranne out of the ships The 26. of May in the Euening wee spake with the Saint Mary and the next day with the Gallion of Malacca the same Morning and in the after noone with the Admirall who willed vs to follow him vnto the Iland of the Ascention The same day one of our slaues fell ouer bord although we vsed all the
rich Gentleman in England and had great yearely reuenewes of his owne inheritance but he was a man very vnquiet in his minde and greatly affected to warre in so much as of his owne priuate motion hee offered his seruice to the Queene he had performed many valiant actes and was greatlie feared in these Islands and knowne of euery man but of nature very seuere so that his owne people hated him for his fiercenes and spake verie hardly of him for when they first entred into the Fleete or Armado they had their great sayle in a readinesse and might possiblie enough haue sayled away for it was one of the best ships for sayle in England and the Master perceiuing that the other shippes had left them and followed not after commaÌ„ded the great sayle to be cut that they might make away but Sir Richard Greenefield threatned both him and all the rest that were in the ship that if any man laid hand vppon it he would cause him to be hanged and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight and in the end were taken He was of so hard a complection that as he continued among the Spanish Captaines while they were at dinner or supper with him he would carouse three or foure glasses of wine and in a brauerie take the glasses betweene his teeth and crash them in peeces and swallow them downe so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harme at all vnto him and this was told me by diuers credible persons that many times stoode and behelde him The English men that were left in the ship as the captaine of the souldiers the Master and others were dispersed into diuers of the Spanish ships that had taken the where there had almost a new fight arisen betweene the Biscaines and the Portingales while ech of them would haue the honour to haue first borded her so that there grew a great noise and quarrell among them one taking the chiefe ancient the other the flagge and the Captaine and euerie one held his owne The ships that had borded her were altogether out of order and broken and many of their men hurt whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera there to repaire themselues where being ariued I my chaÌ„ber fellow to heare some newes went abord on of the ships being a great at Biscaine and one of the twelue Apostles whose Captaine was called Bertandono that had bin Generall of the Biscaynes in the fleete that went for England Hee séeing vs called vs vp into the gallerie where with great curtesie hee receiued vs beeing as then set at dinner with the English Captaine that sate by him and had on a sute of blacke veluet but he could not tell vs any thing for that he could speake no other language but English and Latine which Baâ—tandano also could a little speake The English Captaine got licence of the gouernour that hee might come on land with his weapon by his side and was in our lodging with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Iland being of that ship wherof the saylers got away as I said before The Gouernour of Tercera bad him to dinner shewed him great curtesâ—e The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land and was in our lodging and had at the least ten or twelue woundes as well in his head as on his body whereof after that being at sea betwéene Lisbone the Ilands he died The Captaine wrote a letter wherein he declared all the manner of the fight and left it with the English Marchant that lay in our lodging to send it to the Lord Admiral of England This English Captaine comming vnto Lisbone was there well receiued and not any hurt done vnto him but with good conuoy sent to Sentinial from thence sayled into England with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners The Spanish armie stated at the Island of 〈◊〉 til the last of September to assemble the rest of the fleet together which in the end were to the number of 14â— saile of ships partly comming from India and partly of the Army being altogether ready vnto saile to 〈◊〉 in good company there sodainely rose so hard and cruell a storme that those of the Island did affirme that in mans memorie there was neuer any such seen or heard of before for it seemed the sea would haue swallowed vp the Islands the water mounting higher than the Cliffes which are so high that it amaseth a man to beholde them but the sea reached aboue them and liuing fishes were throwne vppon the land This storme continued not only a day or two with one wind but seauen or eight dayes continually the wind turning round about in all places of the compasse at the least twice or thrice during that time and all alike with a continuall storme and tempest most terrible to behold euen to vs that were on shore much more then to such as were at sea so that only on the coastes and Cliffes of the Iland of Tercera there were aboue twelue ships cast away and not only vppon the one side but round about it in euery corner wherby nothing els was heard but complayning crying lamenting and telling here is a shippe broken in peeces against the Cliffes there another and all the men drowned so that for the space of 20. dayes after the storme they did nothing els but fish for dead men that continually came driuing on the shore Among the rest was the English ship called the Reuenge that was cast away vpon a Cliffe nere to the Iland of Tercera where it brake in a hundred péeces and sunke to the ground hauing in her â—â— men Gallegos Biscaines and others with some of the captiue Englishmen whereof but one was saued that got vp vpon the Cliffes aliue and had his body and head all wounded and hee being on shore brought vs the newes desiring to be shriuen thervpon presently died The Reuenge had in her diuers faire brasse péeces that were all sunke in the sea which they of the Island were in good hope to waigh vp againe The next summer after among these shippes that were cast away about Tercera was likewise a Flie boat one of those that had bin arested in Portugall to serue the king called the white Doue The Master of her was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland and there were in her one hundred souldiers as in euerie one of the rest there was He being ouer ruled by the Captaine that he could not be Master of his owne sayling here and there at the mercie of God as the storme droue him in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera which the Spaniards perceiuing thought al their safety only to consist in putting into the road compelling the Master and the Pilot to make towards the Island although the Master refused to doe it saying that they were most sure
and do ouerflow more then they are in the furder and very drie countries for in Egypt not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same where it neuer raineth it is holden for a verie strange wonderful thing how the riuer Niâ— should grâ—w so high ful of thicke muddie water and alwaies at one time of the yeare not fayling therein thereby refreshing the earth and giuing foode both to man and beast whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle for that without the increase thereof they would die for hunger their liues â—as Iohn Chrisostome sayth consisteth of the increasing of the waters so then the Northwest winds that in our summer time which is their winter blow in our countries are the meanes in those countries to gather cloudes and moystures vpon the high hilles from whence their raine proceedeth which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing ouerflowing of the riuer Niâ—us and other riuers in those countries wherof the inhabitants haue deuised and written to many fables But in their summer which is our winter there bloweth contrary windes as south and southeast which without al doubt are cold as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike and coole those countries as our winds do here in these countries like as with theÌ„ they cause a faire cleare aire so with vs they cause great store of raines by a certain natural disposition of the heauens the climates ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God that hath diuided the heauens ordained the course of the sun and other planets in such maner that al parts of the earth by their light brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes therein do continue with great proportion and equalitie so that for certain if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia Congo and other places bordering on the same it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies the countries of Asia Mynor and those of Suria and Egypt which liue by the refreshing of those generall Northwest west winds which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero that is bringing life those also are the cause that in Ethiopia Congo and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth no not vpon the highest hilles vnlesse it bee further off towardes the Cape de Bona Speranza or in some certaine places by the Portingales called Snow hilles as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow which with them would bee more esteemed then gold therewith to coole their drink so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow but only by means of the coÌ„tinual raine of fiue moneths as I said before But returning to our former matter you may trauel to Congo by two waies one by the main sea to S. Helena and so further ouer or along by the coast of Affrica to the Island of Saint Thomas and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equinoctiall line about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island and from thence they saile with the wind that commeth off the land along the coast euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vntill they arriue at the place where they desire to be The kingdome of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina which lyeth on the South side of the Equinoctial line vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast you saile by certain hils and strands not woorth the noting till you come to two creekes in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales that is the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzaleâ— not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea by reason of the rednesse thereof by the Portingales called Rio de â—as Boreras Râ—slas because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande that coloureth the water at that place beginneth a high hill called by the Portingales la Sierra Complida that is a long hill passing further there is another riuer called â—a â—e â—as Almadias which is as much to say as the creeke or hauen for shippes because in that place many bankes are made in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited wherein there is a hauen for little ships the other two are not inhabited Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo called Zaâ—e taking his beginning or spring partly froÌ„ the same lake froÌ„ whence the riuer Nylus doth flow This riuer casteth forth so great aboundance of water that it is incredible for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles broad on y e vpper part it is fresh water for 8 10. 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea whereby the pilots sailing ouer it know what place they are in Vpwards into this riuer you may saile with great barks she length of fine miles but not higher by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground as the riuers of Nilus Donow and Rhein do in some places which are called Cataraâ—tas that is shedings or fallings of waters making so great a noyse that it may bee heard a great way from it In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many Islands al inhabited and very populous that haue diuers gouernours al subiectes to the king of Congo In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the other in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree in their language called Licondo whereof some are so great that sixe men cannot fadome them with height and length correspondent so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute woulde holde two hundred men Those scutes they rowe with ores wherwith they make great speede euery man hauing an ore and a bowe and when they fight they lay downe the ore and vse their bowe and to steere and winde those scutes they vse no other ruther than one of those ores In this riuer there are many strange beastes specially Crocadiles that are very great in their language called Carman the sea horse and another that seemeth to haue handes and a taile like vnto a Flaske which they call Ambize Angulo that is a sea hogge because it is as fatte as a hogge it hath a good and sauoury flesh not like fish although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer but eateth
prouince was in time past a free kingdome ruled and gouerned of it selfe on the North side reaching towardes Sundy on the South side to Batta on the West to the country of Congo and on the East to the Sunne hilles The cheefest towne is called Pango and lyeth on the West side of the Riuer Barbela which issueth out of the great lake from whence Nilus floweth their traffike is like those of Sundi Batta the fift prouince on the North side ioyneth to Pango and on the East to the Riuer Barbela and so to the sunne hilles and to the foote of the Saltpeeter hils and of the South side of the same hils it reacheth to Barbela til you come to the burnt hil The cheefe towne is called Batta where the gouernor is resident which gouernor is allowed to haue musket and caliuer shot because that Eastward beyond the sun Saltpeeter hils on the East and West side of the riuer Nilus there dwelleth certaine people of the Congoers called Gâ—aquas and in their owne countrie Agag verie fierce and cruel and much giuen to fight to steale whose ordinary incursions into the countries about theÌ„ and also into Batta maketh them necessarily to stand vpon theyr guard so to defend theÌ„selues This prouince can raise 70. or 80. thousande men well armed from thence are brought many Sables and Flumen the rest of their traffike is like these at Pango and Sundi In Peniba being the sixt prouince â—â—th the cheefe Citie 〈◊〉 in times past called Banza that is the head and now by the Portingales S. Saâ—tor it lyeth on a hill within the land distant from the sea 1â—â— Italian miles or thirty Duch mâ—les 〈◊〉 hil verie great and high and most 〈◊〉 yet it yeeldeth iron being about two Duch miles in compasse al built with man â—lages and houses where there are about 100. thousand men This hil is very fruitful by reason of the fresh ayre which is very cleare and sounde it yeeldeth much good water which neuer hurteth inâ— is rich of grasse and al kindes of beastes and fruitfull trees which are alwaies greene aboundant in al sorts of graine that are vsed in those countries specially of one sort called Luco which is holden and esteemed for the best and principall kinde of graine as our wheat but smaller like mustardseed and somewhat greater which they grinde in handmilles whereof they make a verie white flower making bread that is both wholesome and of a good sauour and not much vnlike our bread made of wheate of this grain they haue great store in Congo which not long since was first brought thither from the riuer Nylus specially from that place where Nilus fills the second lake There is also much barly called Mazza di Congo that is graine of Congo and also great quantitie of Maiz that is Turkishe wheate which is there but little estéemed and by their country people called Mazza Manprito that is graine of Portingale wherewith they fatten their hogges of rice they haue great plenty but nothing worth This country is likewise ful of diuers sorts of fruitful trées so that the common sort of people for the most part doe nourish themselues therewith as citrons lemons and specially very pleasaunt oranges neither swéet nor sowre but indifferent betwéene both there are likewise many Bananes which some thinke to be the fruit that in Siria and Egypt are called Mase and in this Booke Indian Figs they are very pleasant and sauery fruit of a swéete and sowerish taste being a good sustenance for the countrey in the fatte land there groweth many sortes of palme trees as the Indian Nutts and such as bring forth Dates some greater and other sortes of Palme trees whereof they make oyle wine vineger fruit and bread they presse the oyle out of the fruite as the Spaniardes do oliues which for colour and substaunce is like our butter but gréene and somwhat yelow which they vse in stéede of oyle and butter and burne it in lampes they likewise annoynt their bodies therewith to conclude it is good to eate in tune of néede as it hapned to our men that without this oyle had died for hunger Of the same oyle brought from thence together with the wine and vineger of the same palme trees I can shew you the wine they draw out of the top of the tree which being bored there issueth a certaine iuyce like milke being colde and fresh to drincke the first that commeth foorth is sweete and very pleasant next issueth sowre and the last is vineger which may be vsed in sallets but beeing drinke when it is fresh and newe it maketh the water to auoyde whereby in those countries men are little troubled with the stone and drincking much it maketh them drunke and fasseneth well The bread they make of the stones of this fruit which in forme are like almonds but much harder within those stones are certaine kernels very pleasaunt to eate increasing sound and good flesh this fruit both inwardly and outwardly is gréene and is eaten both rawe and sodden There are other trées that bring foorth a certaine fruit called Cola as great as a pine apple within it hauing an other kinde of fruit like chesnuts wherein are foure redde or carnation hoales which they holde in theyr mouths sucking and chawing them thereby to quench their thirst This fruit put into water maketh it sowre and of a good taste they strengthen the stomacke and are passing good for an euil lyuer other sortes of wilde Palme trees are likewise found there which yéelde much fruiâ— to bée eaten the leaues seruing to make mais to couer houses and to make baskets or other necessary housholde stuffe whereof I haue many sortes There are likewise other trées caled Ogbeghe which bring forth fruit in forme like yellow plumbes pleasant both in smel and taste from these trees they cut certaine braunches which they plant or sette close together making them fast each to other as wée doe Bore or Thornes therewith making sences for their houses which branches growing vp they make likewise galleries and arbors therein to kéepe them from the heate of the Sunne Besides al the fruits aforesaide there are many other sorts verie good for phisicke as also to eate specially Tamarinde of a verie tart and pleasant taste and verie good against burning feauers The Moores and Turkes trauelling by land take the rind of Tamarinde with them and mixing it with water drinke it to coole the inward heate specially the lyuer kidnies thereby also to make them laxatiue as also Cassia Fistula which is there verie plentiful also Citrons Melons Pompions Cucumbers and al other sorts of fruites that grow out of the earth Such as desire a larger discourse touching the same let them reade Odoardus Lopez translated by Pigaâ—etta and printed in Rome from whence I haue gathered the most parte heereof and although the houses in Congo are small and low yet there wanteth no substance to
along the coast by the riuer of Cuama you come to a small kingdome liing vppon the sea side called Angoscia taking the name from certaine Islandes that beare the same name lying right against it inhabited by Mahometanes and Heathens which in small shippes doe traffike and deale in such wares as those of Sofala vse And sayling further you discouer the kingdome of Mosambique lying vnder fouretéene degrees and a halfe whereof I haue sufficient spoken heretofore as also of the Island lying behinde it called Quiloa and the great Island of S. Laurence making the chanell which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad and in the middle towardes Mosambique where it is narrowest a hundred and seauentie miles kéeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India containing many Islandes The shippes that saile from Spaine into India and from India into Spaine do commonly keepe their course through this channell vnlesse they be otherwise compelled by the winde and surely this Island deserueth to haue better people than it hath inhabiting therein because of the situation hauing many good and safe hauens togither with fayre riuers sweet fresh waters which cause the land to bring forth diuers kinds of fruits and spices as beans pease rice and corn oranges lemons and citrons and all sortes of flesh tame and wilde hennes swine and harts of very good and sweete flesh by reason of the fertilitie and excellent good fish The inhabitants are heathens and some of Mahomets sect of a fayre colour much giuen to war and to their weapons specially bowes and woodden holberts This Island is diuided into foure gouernments ech fighting against other Therein are many mines of gold siluer copper yron and other metals but the wilde people vse not to traffike out of their owne countrey but onely sayle in small scutes cut out of trées from one place of the Island to the other for the most parte not suffering any traffike in their Island with strangers yet the Portingales at this time traffike in some of their hauens but go not on land and from thence bring ambergreece ware siluer copper rice and diuers other wares In this chanel betwéen the firme land of Affrica and this Island there lieth many both great and small Islands al inhabited by Mahometanes among the which the chiefe is S. Christofer then the Holyghost another called Magliaglie as also Comoro Anzoame Maiotto and such like Returning againe vnto the coast and hauing passed Quiloa you sée the kingdome of Mombaza lying vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side taking the name from a certaine Island so called wherein lieth a faire towne with many goodly buildings beautiffied with diuers Images and figures the king being a Mahometane who withstanding the Portingales spéede like those of Quiloa taking it by force where they found much golde siluer pearles cotten linnen silkes and cloth of golde with other sortes of merchandises This Island bordureth on Quiloa and Melinde inhabited by heathens and Mahometanes and subiect to the king of Monemugi Sayling further you come to the kingdome of Melinde which is likewise verie small stretching along the sea coast till you come to the riuer Chimamchi lying vnder two degrees and a halfe and vpwardes by the riuer it runneth to a lake called Calice about a hundred Italian miles or twentie Dutch miles In this countrey about the sea side there is a very great towne most inhabited by white people al heathens and Mahometanes their houses are built almost like the houses in Portingale theyr sheepe are almost as bigge againe as those in Portingale with tailes which are accounted for a quarter of mutton weighing at the lest fiue and twenty or thirtie pound The women are white and dresse themselues after the manner of Arabia very prowdly and in great pompe al in silkes wearing about their neckes armes and legges iewels rings and bracelets of gold going with their faces couered like the Egyptian women not being seene or known but when it pleaseth them in this towne there is a good hauen for ships to lie in and for the most parte the people are friendly vpright in worde and déede holding good friendshippe with strangers specially with the Portingales giuing them much credit and neuer hurting them Betweene the ii heads of Mombaza and Melinde there lieth three Islands the first called Momsie the second Zanzibar and the third Pâ—mba all inhabited by Mahometanes white of colour very rich and abundant in wealth but not vsed to the warres only to til th earth In those Islands is much sugar which is by them brought in boates vnto the firme land with other fruites of those Islandes within the firme land Beyond those three kingdomes of Quiloa Melinde and Mumbaza lieth the great and large kingdome of Monemugi which on the south lieth vppon the kingdome of Molambique by the riuer of Coâ—uo and on the west vpon the riuer Nylus between the two lakes on the north vppon the Land of Pâ—esâ—eâ— lolin it liueth peaceably with the 3. kingdomes aforesaid traffiking with them for cotten linnen which is brought thither out of Cambaia w t such like wares brought out of India which they barter for gold siluer copper and iuory but on the other side towards Monomotapa it hath continuall warres and that so cruel and bloody that it can hardly be knowne who hath the victory because in that place there méeteth two mighty people and those that are most expert in armes throughout all Affrica for those of Monomotapa the women called Amazon whereof I spake before and for Monemugi the people by those of Mencongi called Giachi but in their owne spéech Agagi which in time past vsed much to inuade the kingdome of Congo nothing incomparable for strength and agillitie to the Amazons This people haue a custome with hote yrons to burne their faces especially their vpper lippes and so make strikes and lines in them also they turne their eye lids vpwards and round about They are blacke with shining skinnes The white of their eies being of so swart a colour that by their faces they seeme to be stange and cruel moÌ„sters they are il fauored great bodies liuing in the fields like beasts eate mans flesh In war they are most couragious setting most fiercely vpon their enemie their arms are darts wherin they are most cunning Comming again vnto the Coast hauing past the kingdome of Melinde to the Cape de Guarda fuy there are many other places inhabited by white Mahometanes where there are some good hauens whither diuers strange shippes and Marchants with their wares doe ordinarily resort wherof the chéefe is Pate the second Braua the third Magadoxo the fourth Amffion and behinde that reacheth the broade and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy which because of the greatnes issueth farre into the sea is knowne by many ships comming out of India Arabia Ormus other places And about this Cape the
the rest and Bahama which lie al north from Câ—ba and saint Doâ—inicâ— The common opinion is that these Islandes were all one land and ioyned to the great Island and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other as it is thought of Iâ—aly and Ciciâ—ia They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees the people of those Islands are whiter and better proportioned then those of Cuba and Spaignuola specially the women that are verie faire for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel as from Florida Cachora and Iucatan because there they founde more pleasure among the people then in other Islands and great difference in their speech whereupon hath risen the common opinion that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell beeing women that burnt their right breasts the better to shoote in bowes when they went to fight against their enemies and that there was a fountaine that made olde women yong The men go naked onely when they go to wars and when they keepe any feastes or vse to dance then they put on a certaine cotten garment and other garments of diuers coloured feathers finely wrought with a great plume of feathers on their heades Touching the women they haue verie strange customes for the married women or such as haue had the company of a man they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees with certaine mantils of cotten made in manner of nets wherein they sticke certaine leaues otherwise they go naked vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers and then they inuite al their friendes and make a great feast or banket as if they were married with great signes of ioy and then they beginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried They are in great subiection to their maisters in such maner as that if they should command them to throw themselues headlong from off a hil or to do any other thing whatsoeuer they wil not refuse to do it what danger soeuer consisteth therin not once asking wherefore they should doo it but only because the master commandeth it Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground hunting fishing for that whatsoeuer is sowed or planted hunted or fished in any respect is onelie in the kings power and done by his commandement which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people directing euerie man what he should do The fruit that is reaped and gathered is brought all into a place appointed and from thence it is yearely deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees stuards distributers of the common goods of the countrey thinke then I beseech you what a golden time those people had where neither this is mine or this is thine was euer heard among them The only wel spring of strife contentioÌ„ Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but playing at the ball fishing and hunting where neither law nor processe was vsed nor decided where onely the kings will was a lawe and in all things were content to obey it They found certaine red stones in shels of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among theÌ„ which they weare at their cares and others more esteemed of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes whereof the flesh is very good to eate of a fire red colour cleare and so like rubies that they could hardly be discerned from them whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Cohoâ—o and the stones Cohibici They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side certaine cleare shining stones yellow blacke and other colours whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels to weare about their necks armes and legs in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh nor eate it not their meate is fish breda of wheate rootes and some fruites The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba died there with eating flesh it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons other birues which build their nestes in the Trees that many out of the firme land and also from the other Islands come thither and load whole scutes ful and take them with them the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon and somwhat better and hot like ginger smelling like cloues yet are they not accounted for spices among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Iaâ—â—ma both sauorie and holsome about a span and a halfe long like a fig when it is greene the leafe likewise not much differing from the fig leafe and of the bignesse of a willow tree not close like other trees nor hollow like reedes but fast like Elders the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds as the Spaniards haue wel tryed To speake more hereof is needelesse those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited for because they haue no gold The Spaniards carried many thousandes of them into other places and in seeking for Golde spoyled and destroyed them Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast and first Cuba being one of the principal Islands vnder the Antillas CVba another verie great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by Columbus first foundout and discouered in An. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and Iâ—hannam as also Alpha and Omega as Peter Martin saith and by others the Island is called saint Iacob after the name of the cheefest towne therein which by reason of the great hauen as also the situation therof hath a verie great traffike as hauing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo on the West Iucatan on the North the great Cape of Florida and on the South the Island Iamaica all set downe in this Carde It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe because it is longer theÌ„ broad being in length from east to west three hundred miles and from north to south seuenty miles in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees and in latitude or height twentie degrees It was long time accounted for firme land because of the greatnesse which is no maruaile for the inhabitants themselues knew no other but that it had no ende and also long after the Spaniards comming thither because the people are poore and naked contented with a little and with their own not seeking any further neither caring what their neighbours did and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vnder the heauens then that wherein they dwelt The ground is high rough and sharpe of hils the sea in many places being white and the riuers small and good water rich of golde and good copper the aire temperate
Cucumbers and Gourdes within sixe and thirtie dayes are also ripe and verie sauory aboue al others whatsoeuer The forme of the Island is like a chesnut tree leafe in the middle of the Island there passeth a stony or rough hil in forme of a mans backe which is called Cibam or Cipangi where in times past much gold was founde out of this hil runneth foure great riuers diuiding the Island into foure partes wherof the one is in the East and is called Iunna the second in the west called Attibunicus the third in the north called Iachem and the fourth in the South called Naxban whereabouts there is much brasile wood and woods of diuers spices but not like our spices which they barter for other wares specially for stooles and dishes of blacke ebanny Vppon the hil of Cibano lyeth the Castle of Saint Thomas There are likewise many townes within this Islande the principall called Saint Dominico made by Bartholomeo Columbo and by him so named because they arriued in that Island vpon saint Dominicks day it lyeth on a plaine ground vpon the sea side and hath aboue fiue hundred houses built after the spanish maner on the West side therof runneth the riuer Ozama or Ozonca into the sea where there is a good hauen in the which manie shippes may anker about this Riuer lyeth verie great and thicke woodes the greatest traffike next their golde is sugar and hides for that al sorts of foure footed beasts being brought thither out of Spaine haue so much increased therein that there are some spaniards in the Isle that haue sixe thousand or eight thousand beastes Isabella and another towne lying on the other side of the same Islande in a valley concerning the situation the people their Religion and customes you may sufficiently reade in the spanish Histories thereof set forth yet will I note some that are verie strange in this Island are certain wormes verie common among them and by the inhabitants called Cuuero in greatnesse as bigge as a ioynt of a mans finger with foure wings two verie little the other two somewhat greater and harder and are as couers to the smaller these wormes shine by night as the sloe wormes here with vs which light doth not onely appeare like a starre casting forth streames and shining out of their eies but also in the whole body so that when they flie and spreade their wings they giue much more light out of their bodyes then when they sitte still in which wormes men may well beholde the great workes and blessings of God by his strange gifts bestowed vpon his creatures for by the light of this little worme the darkest chamber that is in the night time may be made cleare and bright whereby a man may reade write or do any thing not néeding any other light and likewise if a man beare that worme in his hand he shall haue as great a light as if he bore a torch or lanterne and many light others therewith and the more wormes there are the greater will be the light Not farre from Hyspaniola lyeth another small Islande called Mona betweene Hispaniola and Boriquena or Saint Iohns vnder seuenteene degrées on the North side of the line This Islande is small and flatte and euen lande in bignesse about three miles and inhabited by a fewe Indians and Christians it hath verie good water and is ful of fish specially of verie good creuishes Boriquen FRom this Island you come vnto Boriquen now named S. Iohn a rich hauen on the East side it hath the Island of Sancta Croce on the West other small Islandes Northwarde the Islande of Saint Dominico which is fiue and twentie miles distant and on the South the Cape of Paria distant aboue three hundreth thirtie and sixe miles The length of this Islande is more then the breadth for from East to West it is fiftie miles from north to South eighteene miles and is diuided into twoo partes that is the North and the South quarter the middle of the Island lyeth vnder 303. degrees longitude and 18. degrees latitude in forme almost square populous and wel housed hauing many good hauens and woods The inhabitants haue continual warres against the Canibals or such as eate mens flesh This Island was rich of gold on the north side and towardes the south fruitfull of bread fruit grasse and fish it is said these people vsed not to eate any flesh which is to be vnderstood of wilde flesh but they eate many birdes as Pigeons and such like in other things they are like those of Hispaniola onely that they are better souldiers and vse bowes and arrowes in this Islande there is a certaine gumme by them called Taâ—unuo vnholsome and fatty like tallow wherewith and with oyle they dresse their shippes and because it is bitter it preserueth the ships from wormes There is likewise much por wood which is vsed to heale the pore and other diseases This Island was discouered by Chrostopherus Coâ—umbuâ— in his second voyage into India There is a verie strange and notable Historie written of the inhabitants hereof which is that at the first arriual of the Spaniards in that Island they thought the Spaniards to be immortal and neuer died whereof to be assured vppon a time one of their Cariquen or Lords called Vraioa de Yaguara caused one of the Spaniards to be taken and to prooue if he were immortal caused him to be put into a Riuer vnder the water and there holden to see if hee would come foorth aliue but being dead and brought before the king he was thereby assured of their mortalitie whereupon he rose against them and slew 150. of them that were busie in seeking of gold Saint Crus Hay Hay FRom Borequien you come to the Island S. Câ—us in time past by the inhabitants called Hay Hay being inhabited by Canibals or eaters of men as also the next vnto it called Guadalupea by them called Quiâ—ra or Quera which Caribes or Canibales had in short time deuoured at the least 5000. men which they stole and tooke out of the Islandes rounde about them from thence you come to diuers other Islandes which lie like an Archipelago hauing the same name but many of them are likewise called after the forme or fashion that they beare as Anguilla which is an eele as being long and smal Redonda Maria because it is like a spheare verie round Monâ—ratuâ— that is a closed hil because the Island hath high hils round about it ful of people and victuals some of saints as S. Mi 〈…〉 S. Bartholmew S. Barbara Beata â—iâ—gâ— Antigua till you come to the olde Virgin Maryes which lie together in a rowe verie pleasant to beholde some greene others red blew yellow and violet most wonderful to such as saile by them wherof many colours are made Guadalupea BY Antigua lieth Guadalâ—peâ— the cheefe and greatest Islande of Canibals foure degrees distant from the Equinoctiall line it is round aboue 130. miles and diuided by
and therefore needelesse to rehearse Returning againe to the lake of Nicaragua therein are great fishes and amongest the rest a certaine kinde of fish in Spanish called Manâ— hauing finnes hard by their heades like two hands this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foote long and twelue foote thicke the head and tayle like an oxe small eies hard and hairie skinne of colour light blew with two feete like elophantes feete the sinnes standing out like Kopen feeding their yong ones with their dugges This fish feedeth both on land and in the water they are very familiar with men whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing which is that there was a king called Caâ—aâ—amavuis that had taken a yoong Mâ—nate which for the space of six and twenty yeres he kept and broght vp with bread in a lake called Guamabo that bordered vpon his house which fish in time became so tame that he surpassed the dolphin wherof we reade so many histories for that at what time soeuer the kings seruants called him Matto Matto which in Indian spéech is Manisecale or curteous hee would presently come out of the lake and eate meate out of their handes and woulde likewise come out of the water and goe into the house to fetch his meate and there woulde play with the children and when any man was desirous to go ouer the lake he would oftentimes take eight or tenne of them together and swimming beare them lightly on his backe ouer the water in which manner playing with him the Indians kept this fish long time til by some iniury done vnto him he became angry for that vppon a time as a Spaniard would prooue if his skinne were as hard as they reported it to be threw an arrow or dart at him and although it hurt him not yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow and from that time perceiuing that men with beards and in apparel were there they might wel call him but al in vaine for he would neuer come vp againe but in the end when the riuer Aâ—bunicus chaunced to flowe so high that it ranne ouer the bankes and so into the lake Guaniabo the fish folowed the streame and swamme into the sea these kindes of fishes are much seene and taken in that countrey for that their flesh is of a very good taste like hogs flesh which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios and other places The lake of Nicaragua lyeth not farre from the south sea and about a hundred miles from the north sea running through a riuer that is ful of ships which the Spaniardes called Desaguadera that is falling of water therein Thereabouts in that riuer there are many crocadiles that lay their egges vpon the sands on the riuers sides as bigge as geese egs which being throwne against a stone wil bruised but not breake and in time of hunger are eaten by the spaniards their taste is like a Moschuâ— halfe rotten and by the Indians is accounted for an excellent kinde of meate by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharpe because of the thicke woodes and vneuen hilles where not onely horses but men can hardly passe ouer vnlesse it be with great paine and labour about this countrey for the space of foure months there are certaine Torteâ—ux that doe continue in the sea as also vppon the shoare which lay their egges as the crocadiles doe in the sand vppon the shoare whereof presently by reason of the great heate of the sunne there commeth yoong Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh is wholesome and pleasant to eate From Cabo de Gratias a dios to the Rio Grande or Desaguadera as I said before are seuenty miles from Desaguadera to Corobaro are fortie miles from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fiftie miles betwéene Corobaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua and the riuer Swerus these 90. miles lie vnder nine degrees and ½ so that from the poynt of Iucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500. miles As touching the maners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the riuer Swerus dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest onely that they eate no mans flesh in their countrey are many beares tigers and lions that are very fearfull and flee when they see a man there are likewise very great snakes but not venomous and many sea cats there is likewise an other kinde of beast called Cascui in a manner like a blacke pigge hairie with a hard skinne smal eies open eares like an elephant but not ful so open nor hanging down clouen feet and a litle snowt armed like an elephant and of so shril a voyce that it maketh men deafe and is of a good and sauory flesh There is likewise an other wonderful and straunge beast of Gesnerus called a Foxe apâ— on the belly whereof Nature hath formed an other belly wherein when it goeth into any place it hideth her young ones and so beareth them about her This beast hath a body and member like a foxe feete like mens hands or like sea cattes feete eares like a batte it is neuer seene that this beast letteth her yong ones come foorth but when they sucke or ease themselues but are alwayes therein vntil they can gette their own meate also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or Iuanna not much vnlike our eftes hauing a thing hanging at his chinne like vnto a beard and on her head a combe like a cockes combe vpon his backe certaine sharpe quilles sticking vpright like thornes and amongest the rest some hauing teeth like a sawe with a sharp taile and stretching out sometimes winding like the adder This beast is accounted among the vnhurtfull snakes euery time it layeth it hath fortie or fiftie egs round and as big as a nut whereof the yellow is seperated from the white like hennes egs they are good to eate and very sauory flesh but not roasted either in oyle or butter onely in water this beast feedeth both on land and in the water it climeth trees and is fearful to behold specially to those that knowe not the nature thereof yet it is so gentle quiet that it maketh not any noyse and being taken and bound it liueth at the least tenne or twelue dayes without meate it is of a good and sauoury flesh and is kept for likorishnesse specially the women onely such as haue had the pox if they eate it their paine reneweth Nombre de Dios. NOmbre de Dios is a towne of traffike lying on the north sea so named by Diego de Niquesa a Spaniard that had indured some hard fortune and landing in that hauen with the rest of his men saide â—n Nombre de Dios that is in the name of God and so began his worke againe which before he did pretend and there erected certaine houses giuing the place the name aforesaid this towne lieth east and west vpon the sea side in the middle of a very
string hiding their members therein or in a Snakes shel the rest of theyr bodies are al naked Thus much for the customes and manners of Curiana Betweene the Cape of Saint Roman and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara and P. Secco From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles the coast lying vnder tenne degrees betweene them lieth manie hauens and riuers specialy Puerto di Canna Fistola P. Fleâ—chado that is the point where they were shotte at with arrowes Punto Muerte the dead hauen Cabo de Ioan Blanco the cape of Iohn White Cabo la Colhera Rio Dunari Illa de Pirico Maracapana Chelheribiche St. Fee that is holy Faith Rio de Cumana Punta D'araâ—a Câ—mâ—â— and Maracapana along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands as Moines that is the Isle of Moonks Quiracao Buenaire Good Ayre Rocques or Roca Stone Rockes de Aues the Birds Tortuga Torteaux and then Cubagna or Margaritha the Isle of Pearles A certaine description of Maracapana and Cumana CVmana signifieth a Prouince and a Riuer wherin there is a towne and a cloister of grey Friers because of the great numbers of pearles that are found thereabouts The people of this countrey went naked onely that they couered their members eyther in a gorde or Snakes shels or else with bandes of reedes or cotton wooll in wars they weare mantles and decke themselues with feathers at feasts and bankets they paint themselues or else stroke themselues ouer with certaine gum and salues that be clammy wherein they sticke feathers of all colours which is no ill sight they cut their haire aboue their eares and if any haire grow vpon their knees or on their faces they pul them out and will haue no haire vpon any place of their body although they are by nature most of them without beards or haire and such as let their haire grow after the Spanish manner they call them beasts these people make great meanes to make their teeth blacke and such as haue them white they esteeme them to be women because they take no paines to make them blacke which they do with the powder or sap of a certaine hearbe by them called Hay or Gay which leaues are very soft like turpentine leaues and in fashion like Mortella being of the age of 15. yeers and that their courages began to rise they begin to beare those leaues in their mouths and to chaw them vntil their teeth become as blacke as coles which blacknesse continueth vntill they die which likewise preserueth the teeth from rotting spoyling or any paine they mire the powder of that leafe with another sort of powder of a kinde of wood and with chalk of white shells burned in which sort those of the East Indies vse their betele and Arrecca with chalke of oysters which is already declared in the description of the East Indies the powder of these leaues woodde and chalke they beare continually in their mouthes still chawing it which they keepe in basketts and boxes made of reedes to sel and barter the same in the markets round about them for gold slaues and cotten and for other wares al the maides goe naked only they weare certaine bandes about their knees which they binde very hard that their hips and thighes may seeme thicke which they estéeme for a beauty the married women weare shooes and liue very honestly and if they commit adultery they are forsaken by their husbands punished The lords and rich men of the country haue as many wiues as they list and if any man come to their houses to lodge they giue them one of the fairest to lie by them the rest haue but one and some none the women till the land and looke to the house and the men not being in the warres doe fish and hunt they are highminded reuengeatiue and hastie their chiefe weapons are poysoned arrowes which they prepare in diuers maners as with the blood of snakes the iuice of hearbes and mixtures of many other things whereby there is no means to heale such as are once wounded therewith The children women and men from their youth vpwards learne to shoote in bowes their meate is horsleaches battes grashoppers creuishes spiders bees and rawe sodden and rosted lice they spare no liuing creature whatsoeuer but they eat it which is to be wondered at considering their country is so wel replenished with good bread wine fruite fish and all kinde of flesh in great aboundance whereby it commeth that these people haue alwaies spots in their eyes or else are dimme of sight which some notwithstanding impute to the propertie of the water in the riuer of Cumana they close their gardens or lands with cotteÌ„ yarne by them called Bexuco placing it about the height of a man and among them it is accouÌ„ted for a great offence if any man should venter either to climbe ouer or creep vnder that cotten holding for certaine that whosoeuer doth teare it shal die presently after it The men of Cumana as I said before are much giuen to hunting wherein they are verie skilful They hunt and kil Lions Tigers Goates Ileren Hogs and al other kinde of foure footed beasts which they kil with bowes or take with nettes There are likewise in these prouinces many verie strange beasts part whereof are alreadie described and part not he therefore that desireth further instruction heerein let him reade the Spanish historiografers that write larger The women as I said til the ground sow Maiz and all kinde of corne plant Batates and other trees watering them specially the Hay wherewith they make their teeth blacke they plant trées which being cutte there issueth a white liquour like milke which changeth into a sweete gumme verie good to smell vnto They plant likewise other trees called Guareâ—ma whereof the fruit is like a Mulberie but somewhat harder whereof they make a certaine kinde of sodden Must which healeth colde and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire They haue another kind of high and sweete smelling trée which seemeth to be Cedar whereof the wood is verie good to make chests cases by reason of the sweetnesse of the wood good to keep things in but putting bread into them it becommeth so bitter that it is not to be eaten the wood is likewise good to make ships for that it neuer consumeth in the water by wormes or any other meanes There are other trees from whence they haue lime wherewith they gette birdes and annoint their bodyes therewith wherein they stick feathers The land of it selfe bringeth forth Cassia but they eate it not neither knowe how to vse it There are so many Roses and sweete flowers in that countrey that the smel thereof maketh mens heades to ake in smel exceeding muske wormes as grashoppers Caterpillers and such like there are verie manie which destroy the seed There are likewise vains of sea coles burning like pitch whereof they make great profite Thus much concerning the fruitfulnesse of the countrey their
small vnhabited Islandes called Maghensis full of birdes which are so tame that meÌ„ take them with their hands and kil them with staues From thence you go to Cape Frio a verie good hauen well knowne by meanes of the French traffike whereabouts the â—ouâ—upâ—nambauâ—â— friendes to the Frenchmen doo inhabite about this Cape are many great whales in Latine called Prestis and in Duch Sword-fishes yet they are no sword fishes for that their Iawes are full of teeth like Sawes There are likewise on this Cape manie Parrats in as great aboundance as crowes with vs about this Cape lyeth the creeke by the Barbarians called Ganabara and by the Portingales Rio de Ganeâ—râ— because it was discouered in the first moneth of the yeare and the Bayaseâ—moza this creeke is wel knowne to the Frenchmen because they traffike thither and therin had made a fort it lyeth vnder three twentie degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial line right vnder Tropicus Capricorâ— it is in the entrie sixe Spanish miles broad and further in but three or foure miles broad and there lyeth smaller hils then at the entrie The mouth of this creeke is verie dangerous for that if you leaue the sea you must saile by three vnhabited Islandes where it is great fortune but the ships doo strike in peeces vppon the rocks and cliffes you must likewise passe before a pointe not aboue three hundred paces broade which hangeth from a high hil hauing the form of a Piramides which not onely seemeth verie great but far off shewing as if it were made by mans art which by reason of the roundnesse as also because it is like a tower is by the Frenchmen called le pot de Buere that is the Butter potte a little further in the creeke is an euen rock about a hundred and twenty paces great by the Frenchmen called Râ—tier or Mouse fall to which Villagagno at his first arriuall brought all his necessaries and prouision thinking thereon to build a fort but the waues droue him backe againe about halfe a mile further lieth the Islande wherein the Frenchmen did dwell which before their arriuall was not inhabited and is in compasse about a thousand paces yet the breadth is six times more then the length all compassed about with cliffes as also with water in such sort that the shippes cannot come at it but with great danger onely in one place and that with small boates whereby it appeareth that this Island by reason of the situation is very strong on both sides of this Island there standeth a little hill whereupon the Gouernour had made his house and on a Rocke about fiftie or sixtie foote high in the middle of the Islande hee had placed his Court or Castle called Coligni in honour of the Admirall of France that had sent him thither In other plaine fieldes about the same were the rest of the Frenchmens houses made rounde and couered with leaues or boughes being in all about eighty men 10000. paces or two Spanish miles and ½ further from this Island lyeth another verie fruitfull Island in compasse about thrée French miles called the great Island inhabited by Tououpinambaâ—â—iâ—s great friends to the Frenchmen to whome they oftentimes went to fetch meale and other necessaries there are likewise in this creeke many other small and vnhabited Islandes where there are many good oysters the Barbarians diue vnder the water with theyr hands bring vp certaine great stones whereat there hangeth great numbers of Oysters and so fast cleued to the stone that they can hardly gette them off verie good to eate some of them hauing small Pearles within them they are by the Barbarians called Leripes This water is ful of strange fishes specially Barbels and Sea Swine there are likewise whales with verie fatte and thicke skinnes there runneth likewise into this creeke out of the middle part of the land two fresh riuers vppon both the sides whereof lyeth many villages of the Barbarians tenne or fiftéene miles further along the coast towards the riuer de Plata or the straights of Magellana there is another great creeke by the Frenchmen called Vasarum whereunto they vse to saile as they do to the other which they first took in Hereafter followeth the manner and customes of the people THe Toupinambaultii are not much vnlike our people well proportioned of bodie and limbe but stronger and healthsomer then wee and lesse subiect vnto sicknes among them are found fewe lame cripples blinde or mishapen men although there are of them that liue to the age of an hundred and twenty yeares accounting their yeares by the Moones fewe of them likewise hauing gray haires which is a certaine signe of the temperatenes of that land as hauing no extream cold nor excessiue heate hauing greene trées hearbes and fields al the yeare through and because they liue without care they shew alwaies of one age for they haue no hurtful poyson nor foule water to drink whereby all diseases do grow they haue likewise no passions or afflictions of minde in their countreyes which mooue vexe and consume both the spirits and bodyes as not knowing of any fauours couetous desires chidings hate or enuie which but to our shame consumeth the Christians As touching the colour of their bodyes they are not altogether blacke but browne like the Spaniards because of the heate of the sim they go al naked as they came out of theyr mothers wombes not once shaming therat vnlesse it be at bankets or when they goe to warres there are some of them that bind two great leaues together therewith to couer theyr priuie members not so much for their credite but because they haue either some deformity or else disease therin which oftentimes happeneth among them they are not rough nor hairie as some men describe them for they suffer no haire to hang vpon theyr bodyes for that as soone as they perceiue it they plucke it foorth either with theyr nayles or sheeres which they haue either of the Frenchmen or the Portingales which they pull not onely from their chins but also from their eye browes eye liddes which maketh them for the most part seeme feareful and vgly The hinder part of theyr heades is couered with haire the young boyes vntil they come to mans state we are theyr haire from the crowne of the head downe to theyr neckes but al theyr foreheades shauen as if it were a Friers crowne on the hinder part of their heades they let the haire grow after the manner of our auncestors which were all shorne only in their necks and that was rounded They haue likewise for a custome that they bore holdes in their boyes vnderlippes wherein they stick sharp bones as white as Iuorie which they take out and put in as often as they wil and being older they take away the bones and in steed thereof weare greene Iaspis stones being a kinde of bastard Emerauld inwardly flat with a thick ende because they shall not fall out
called Araboutan because of tha great and thick branches not much vnlike our oakes some of them are at the least three fadomes thicke their leaues are like boxe or palmetrées but yeelde no fruite the wood would with great labour and paine be conuayed aboord the shippes if the wild people did not helpe them for the marchants shuld hardly lade a ship in a whole yeare because of the hardnesse and troublesomenesse in the cleauing as also that there are no beasts to draw or carrie it to the shippes but must be brought downe by men which for cloathes shirts hattes kniues and such like things are hired to cleaue and rounde it and to bring it out of the woods farre within the lande vpon their shoulders to the shippes it is much burnt in that countrie and is of nature dry whereby when it it is burnt it maketh little smoke the ashes wherof yeeld a certaine red color the Tououpinambaultii wondered much what our men doe with all that wood asking if there were no wood in our countreies for to burne and answere was made vnto them that we vsed it to die withall as they died their ropes or strings this is shewed in another place Beside this Brasill tree there are fiue kindes of Palme trees whereof the principall is called Gerau the other Iri of these trées I haue sufficiently declared in the Histories of the East Indies as also in the description of the Affrican coast there is a tree called Ayri a kinde of Eban wood with leaues not much vnlike the palme trées the body couered with thicke thornes the fruite thereof indiffeeent great wherein there is a pith as white as snow but not good to eate the wood is blacke and verie hard whereof the Barbarians make theyr halbeards coluen arrowes it is likewise so heauy that it sinketh vnder the water there is also much wood in this countrey whereof some is yellow like Box some violet some white like paper some pale red some varnish red and some darke red whereof likewise they make Halberds another wood is founde therein called Copau whereof the trees are like our wallnut trées but beare no nuttes the wood being plained hath graines like Walnut tree there are many other kindes of trees whereof some haue leaues rounde like pence others great of a foote and a halfe long as also a tree which is very pleasant to beholde and so sweete of smell that it excelleth the rose specially when it is cut to the contrarie there groweth another tree called Aou-at which wood beeing cutte or burnt stinketh so vnreasonably that no man can abide it it hath leaues like our apple trée leaues and a fruit not vnlike the Egiel the nut whereof is so venemous that being eaten it worketh presently but because the Indians make their rattles of this fruit they esteeme it much Besides this there groweth in Brasilia many kindes of fruits and apples pleasant to looke on specially on the sea side but not to be eaten and very daungerous some are like mispelles whereof the Indians warned our men that they should not eate them Hiuourae is a barley about halfe a finger thicke good of taste specially being fresh it is a kinde of pox wood and by the Indians vsed for a certaine disease called Pians which is as daungerous with them as the pox with vs there is likewise a trée by them called Choyne of a reasonable height for leaues forme and greenenesse like the Bay trees the fruit as great as a childes head as bigge as an Estridge egge but not to be eaten the Tonoupinambaultians thereof make certaine rattles by them caled Muaracas of it also they make vessels to drinke with such like things cleaueing them in the middle The tree by them called Sabaneay beareth fruit bigger than a mans two fists whereof they make drinking cuppes and is much like a cup in this nut there are certaine piths not vnlike for forme and taste to the almon There is an other tree in bignesse like a Sorben the fruit wherof is by them called Aca iou of forme and greatnesse like a hennes egge which being ripe is of a golde yellow colour like a quince very good and sauory to eate hauing a certayne sharpe taste and in it a iuice that cooleth heate but because this fruit is not easie to be gathered as being high trees the meere-cattes eate them and such as fall to the ground are the Indians parte Paco-aire is a sprig about tenne or twelue foote high the body as thicke as a mans thigh but yet so soft that it may be cutte in twoo with one blow the fruit thereof is by them called Paco which are of a handfull long in forme like cucumbers and being ripe are of the same colour this fruit groweth 20. or 25. vpon a braunch which the Indians plucke off and carry into their houses they are very pleasant of taste whereof you may reade at large in the East Indian Histories the sprigs that bring foorth cotten are there in great aboundance being of an indifferent greatnesse and haue leaues like the yellow bels of the ash trees froÌ„ whence there groweth an apple as bigge as Bulken which beeing ripe openeth in foure partes and yeeldeth forth cotten the Barbarians call it Ameni iou in the middle of which wool are certain blacke kernels pâ—est together like mens kidneyes and as bigge as beanes this cotten is gathered by the Brasilian women which they spinne and therof make many things Citrons and Lemonds by the Portingales brought into those countries grow there in great aboundance very pleasant and good also many sugar canes whereby much sugar is brought from thence into Portingale it is much to be wondered at that seeing there is so swéet a substance in those reedes while they are fresh and newe gatherd that being but a little withered or put into the water they doo presently conuert into so sower a substance that it is as good Vinegere as any can bee founde Besides these sugar reedes there groweth other reedes as thicke as a mans legge which beeing greene are with one blow easily cutte in two peeces but when they are drie they become verie tough and hard whereof they make arrowes sticks to carry in theyr handes in that countrie likewise is much Masticke excellent good Gumme which was ordinarily brought out of Chio also diuers and innumerable sorts of sweete smelling flowers hearbes And although that about this Cabo de Frio there is much thunder raine and great winds as lying vnder Tropicus Capricorn yet because there falleth no frost snowe nor haile therefore the trees are there alwayes gréene as they are with vs in May and in December when the dayes are shortest and coldest here with vs they are there at the longest and hottest but it is to be vnderstood that they neuer fal out to be so long or short as they are with vs for they haue the day and night of an euener length then we and
your desire and what seeke you as Lerius hath perticularly described then he asketh if he hath a stomake to eate if hee say or make signes that hée is hungrie then presently hee causeth all kinde of victualles to bee sette before him as meale which is their bread rosted flesh of certaine beastes birds and fishes and such like meat which is brought in earthen dishes and because they haue neither Tables nor Stooles they sette it on the grounde and drinke and if they haue any Caouin in the house they giue it him In the end when the women haue wept sufficiently bidding the guest welcome they come vnto him bringing certaine fruites asâ—ing or couertly desiring of him in respect thereof either looking glasses Combes or glasse beades which they weare about their armes and if hee meaneth to stay all night the Mauslacat commaundeth the women to hang him vp a cleane bedde about the which he causeth small fires to be made which oftentimes by night hee causeth to be blowed with a certaine paire of bellowes by them called Tatapecoua which are made of two rounde beddes not much vnlike the fannes wherwith the Gentlewomen in our countrie do kéepe themselues from the heate of the fire which fiers are not made because of the coldnesse of the countrey but to driue away the moystnesse of the night as also because it is a custome with them so to doo and seeing wee are nowe in hand with fire I thinke it not vnconuenient to say some thing thereof they call the fire Tata and the Smoke Tatatin and when they trauaile either to the wars to hunting or to fishing they alwayes haue fire with them because of the Aygnan or Diuell who continually tormenteth them therewith to driue him away which they kindle not with Flint stone and a peece of Stéele as wee vse to doo but rubbe twoo péeces of woodde one against the other one peece béeing soft the other harde which is done in this maner they take a péece of harde wood of a foote long which they make sharpe at one ende almost like a pricke which poynte they thrust it into the soft wood and turne it so often with theyr handes as if they would bore the peece of wood therewith and by that meanes it not onely smoketh but taketh fire which done they take cotten or dried leaues and therewith kindle their fire The guest being in this sort entertained and layd in a cleane cotten bedde if he bée liberall he giueth the men kniues or sheeres to clip and pull out their haires to the women combes or looking glasses and to the children fish hookes and if he chance to haue neede of victuals by the way agreeing with them for their meat hee may take it al with him and because in those countries there are no kindes of beastes to carrie men or their wares they are forced to trauell on foote if they be wearie and that the Indians let them haue some of their maids they presently as being verie willing and ready to serue take vp the burthen often times carrie the man himselfe and if he speaketh vnto them to rest themselues they answere him saying thinke you vs to be as weake and faint as married women that we shuld faint vnder our burthen rather you then shuld think so we would carrie you a whole day long they are likewise touching natural loue better giuen affected then wee for that daily they giue each other flesh fish and fruits it greeueth them that their neighbour shoulde not haue as much as they which liberalitie also they vse to strangers which in this one example by Lerius himselfe tâ—â—d and set downe may sufficiently be proued which is that as Lerius with twoo other Frenchmen trauailed through the woods and was in danger of his life by a fearefull East as also that vnaduisedly hee and his companions had passed hard by the borders of the Margaraters enemies to their friends the Tououpinambaultiers by whom if they had beene taken they had bin eaten and which is more sticking their bodies vpon thornes would haue made them pâ—â—e in that manner for the space of twoo dayes without meate or drinke at the last they came into a village called Pauo where by the Barbarians they were most friendly welcommed who vnderstanding the great danger they had escaped not only from the beast but also of the Margaâ—aters that vse to stick their bodies vpon thornes as I saide before did with such pittie and compassion bewaile theyr hassard that it might assuredly be sayde that those simple Barbarians did not counterfeit but rather wished them all good and first with faire water according to their maner they washed their féet each of them sitting by himselfe in a cleane bedd that done the good man of the house that had made ready their meate set fresh mealeâ— eating like our white bread crums broyled flesh fish and foules with all sorts of their best fruits making them good cheere and when night came he caused all the children to be conuayed out of the roume where they slept that they might not be diseased and in the morning betimes hee came vnto them saying in theyr speech Agite autourassap that is my good friendes haue you rested wel this night and they answered I very well he still as yet sayth hee for I know that yesterday you had a weary iourney To conclude it cannot be expressed with what friendlinesse they were entertained by the Barbarians wherein you may perceiue that although the wilde men are cruell and reuengatiue against their enemies yet they are no lesse louing to their friendes and fauâ—urers Of the healing of the Barbarians diseases of theyr burialles with the sorrow and mourning they make ouer them that are dead IF any of them bee sicke hee sheweth in what place hee is pained causing it to be searched by some one that standeth by or else by the trauellers about the countrey which are their cusening Pages that is Phisitions and are another sort of people then the Caribes who doo likewise affirme that they can ease men of their pains and lengthen their liues Those people are much subiect to feuers and other kindes of diseases but not so common as with vs besides this there raigneth among them a certaine incurable disease called Pâ—auâ— proceeding from their lecherie although many of their children are troubled therewith as yong children with vs are sicke of the small por it maketh blisters greater theÌ„ the ioynt of a mans thumbe which runne ouer al the bodie and face and is no lesse shame vnto them then the French poxe vnto vs they giue the sicke person no meate vnlesse he desire it although he shuld die for hunger and although the sicknesse bee daungerous yet those that are in health spare not to dance leape and drinke thereby troubling the sicke man whereof hee neuer complaineth or once disliketh although it be much greefe vnto him but if hee dieth specially being a
likewise be iudged by the history of Francisco Xeresio who writeth that in Cusco there were houses hauing the gates walls and roofe couered with plates of golde Besides this Giraua writeth that the inhabitantes of Anzerma hadde their weapons breastplates necke peeces and peeces for their shinnes all of massy gold he likewise writeth that about Quito there were gold hilles that yeeld more gold then earth the like do all Historiographers witnesse that write of king Atabalidas ransome which was so great that the like was neuer heard of for that he caused the chamber wherein he was kept prisoner beeing of twoo and twentie foot long and seuenteene foot broad to be filled so full of gold that hee standing vpright therein and stretching his armes and fingers aboue his head as high as hee could reach the gold couered them offering that if they would haue siluer and leaue the gold he would fill the Chamber twice full but the Spaniards tooke the gold whereof the kings duty being a fift part amounted to sixe hundred and seuenteene thousand six hundred fortie seuen Carolus gyldernes 30000. marks of siluer euery horseman had 12000. castilians euerie Castillian of fourteene rialles besides siluer and euerie footeman 1450. castillians besides siluer being 180. markes so that to conclude the golde onely ammounted vnto in Flemish money the summe of three millions eighty eight thousand two hundred fiue carolus gylderns besides the siluer wherby may be knowne the great aboundance of gold and siluer that is in those countries and although Atabalida payed so great a treasour for his ransome yet was it not comparable vnto y e which his elder brother promised to pay so that he might saue his life for that he had all the treasor of his predecessors and also his fathers which were not knowne to Atabalida when he first entered into the kingdome from whence by force he hadde driuen his brother and placed him selfe therein We reade likewise that when the Spaniards first entred that country they shooed their horses with shooes of golde and what it yeeldeth yeerly at this present doth sufficiently appeare by the Armada that came from thence into Spaine the last yeere whiche needeth not heerein to bee declared But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru you must first vnderstand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two townes lying one right ouer against the other the one on the north sea or north side of Peru the other on the south sea seuenteene miles distant one from the other Panama lying in a little valley so neere vnto the sea that when the moone is in the full the sea entereth into the houses lying neerest to the shore the houses thereof are part of reeds and partly made of other substances mixed together most couered with tiles but there are not many houses in the towne There is in this towne a very fitte and safe hauen but very small where with the streame or floud the shippes doe enter and with an ebbe they go out but not heauy laden for that such as are deepe laden would be in danger to fall vpon the flattes in this hauen there runneth both a great floud and ebbe so that where the water is very deepe within an houre after it will bee drie sand whereby the shippes must keepe somewhat from the land discharging and lading their shippes by little scutes as well such as come out of Spaine thither as that goe from thence into Spaine This Towne hath from Peru maiz meale hennes and hony it hath of it selfe kine and hogges oranges lemons coleworts onions lettuce melons and such like things in great abundance This prouince of Panama in time past was much inhabited and haunted by the Indians and al the riuers yeelded gold but now by the Spaniards are most fished drie When men will trauel by land from Panama to Nombre de Dios the first dayes iorney is faire and good way the next day you enter into woods which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come vnto a water which in three houres can hardly be passed ouer because of the many crookings windings thereof and many are cast away therein the streame specially in winter when there falleth much raine running most swiftly Such as compare this towne to Venice are much deceiued for that both of them put together with many other townes erected by the Spaniardes in those countries wil not make the compasse or greatnesse of the Cittie of Venice although euery man may iudge as pleaseth him As touching the maner of sayling from Panama to Peru as also at what times of the yeare you must vnderstand that the best and fittest times of the yeere are in the three first moneths that is Ianuary February and March vntill the moneth of Aprill for as then the Sea is open summer comming on and many of the Brisen which are east and northweast windes doe blowe no weast or southerly windes as then stirring whereby the ships do easily performe their voyages and commonly ariue at their desired hauens before any other winde specially south winde which for the most part of the yeare vpon the coast of Peru doe blowe They may likewise put out in the moneths of August and September but make not so good ariuage as in the moneths aforesaide and if any ships do put out of Panama at other times than in the moneths aforesaide they are sure to haue a long and tedious voyage and commonly som one of them is forced to turne backe againe not being able to gette the coast and are by reason of the southern winds which for the most part of the whole yeere blow vpon the coast as I said before as likewise because of the great contrarie streame many of them are brought into great danger It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru to sayle to Panama Nicaragua and other quarters thereabouts but to sayle to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous and vncertayne The ships that are laden with Spanish wares and depart from Panama first come to â—aboga and the Ilands bordering on the same which haue receiued their names from the Pearles where they take in fresh water in those Islands that are at the least fiue and twentie or thirtie together The Spaniardes in times past founde many Pearles whereof they helde the name of Islas de Paâ—las They lie hardly vnder eight degrées northward The greatest of them in times past was woont to be inhabited but not now because the fishing for pearles beginneth to decay and such as are owners of those Islandes there in keepe slaues of Nicaragua and Cubagâ—a that looke to their beastes and sowe the ground as being very fruitfull from thence they put into the sea westward then see y e poynt called Carrachine which lieth northwest and southest from the great Island of pearles called Taboga distant about thirty Italian miles which are seuen Spanish
miles and a halfe as they come néere vnto this cape they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas or Pine trée hauen the coast runneth south west and southwest and by south and is distaunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe it is a high land with great hilles and dales on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest to Cape de las Correntas that is the cape of Streames which is very small and reacheth into the sea and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters running eastward like riuers many times the Portingale ships which saile that way are forced to anker in the night and in the morning setting saile it happeneth oftentimes that when they thinke to winde that they are stayed and driuen backe agayne so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it but passing forward beyond that Cape you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles which is one Dutch mile and a mile and â— Spanish which was once inhabited it is distant from Cabo de Correntes seuentie fiue miles or foure degrees â— Thereabouts are many riuers all very good water and not farre from thence lyeth the land and riuer of Peru where Pizaâ—us arriued and after his name almost all the country is called Peru from the Iland de las Pâ—linas folowing along the coast and the same course you come to the strand of Bonauentura which is distant from the Island aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles which are two Spannish miles ¼ Hard by this strand which is very great lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1 â— All this side is full of very great hilles and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles by one of those the shippes enter into the land or haâ—â—n of Bonauentura but the â—ilots that puâ—â—h there ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer for that if they be not wel acquainted with it they are like to induâ—e much danger as it happeneth vnto many shippes that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne from this Bay the coast runneth east and east and by south to the Island Gorgona which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles which are ninetéene Spanish miles the coast al along this course is very lowe full of trees and other wilde places and hilles from whence there runneth many great riuers whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn which is inhabited by Barbarians hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes in manner of houelles where many dwell in one house and some alone by themselues because the houses are very long and broade These Indians are rich of gold and their country is very fruitfull the riuers by force of the streames abounding with much gold but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten but with the losse of many people and with great labour This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasurable high wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining and thundering whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and striue one against the other it is in circuite about two miles or sixe Italian miles all high hilles vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks phesants speckled cats great serpents many sea crabbes and night foules seeming as if it were not inhabited it hath likewise much fresh water Summer there beginneth at the end of Maie cleane contrary to Panama whereas then winter beginneth In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru stayed certayne days induring great paine and hunger before they coulde ouercome the countrey This country of Gorgona lieth vnder three degrees and as touching the miles that in this discourse as also in the description of Brasilia and other places I haue obserued they are all Spanish miles whereof seuenteene 1 â— make a degrée from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest to the Iland del Galâ—o or of the Cocke all this coast being lowe and full of vallies from whence there runneth many riuers this Iland is small and in compas scarse a mile or about three Italian miles it hath certayne redde Downes The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Manglaâ—es which are trees so called and in our Card Manglalos which lieth scarce vnder two degrées and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles little more or lesse or foure and twenty Italian miles the coast is low and ful of vallies and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea which inwards to the land are inhabited from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob or S. Iago and maketh a greate Creeke where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob where the gouernement of Pizarro began and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water and at the sterne they touch the ground and also it is often found that sometimes they sayle in two fadomes water and presently they find ninetie fadomes which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth and although there are such banks yet are they not dangerous neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will The strand of S. Mathew in our Carde Mathias lyeth full in one degree from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles that is seuen Spanish miles and one halfe this poynt lieth on high ground and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes that are of the same height This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée on the north side of the Equinoctiall line From thence the coast runneth southweast to the poynt Passao which is the first hauen of Peru ouer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea which are called Liquixinus in Latine Quisinuae and there about there is an indifferent good Hauen where the ships finde good water and wood to burne From the poynt Passao to the firme land are diuers high hilles that are called De Quaque
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
lie to catch fish about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande where on the loofe side the ships may harber it is called Chulâ— from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles it lyeth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Reâ—es to Arequipa DEparting from Lyma and following the coast about three spanish miles or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama in our card Pachamma a most pleasant place and wel known among the Peruuians because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein for riches exceeding al others in that countrey being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth in the which temple were many painted doores wals with formes of wilde beasts in the middle therof where the idoll stood were the priests that shewed themselues to be verie holie and when they offered sacrifice for all the people they turned their faces towardes the gates of the temple and their backs to the Image casting downe their eyes and ful of fearefull demonstrations made great stamping as some of the old Indians say like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo when the people staied to heare the prophesies Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their demaunds and what he sayd they beleeued in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden and the priestes were greatly esteemed the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaundements rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried about that Church but onely their kings noblemen and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage bringing certaine offerings with them when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare there assembled many people that according to their manner plaied on instruments when the kings of Casco subdued the vallie they hauing a custome throughout al their countries to erect temples in the honour of the sunne and beholding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place as also the great deuotion vsed therein they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church but appoynted another to be made by it in honour of the sunne which shuld be esteemed the greater which according to the kings commandement being finished be indowed it with great gifts sending thither certaine women wherwith the diuell of Pachacanâ—a was verie well pleased as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them being serued as well in the one temple as in the other and keeping the poore soules vnder his power and now although this temple is defaced yet hee ceaseth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one thereby to keepe them in obedience vnto him and not to become christians In steede of those Idols there are crosses erected as they think to please the diuel the name of the diuell was Creator of the world for Camac is creator and Pacha world but God permitting Francis Pizaâ—ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple and to take away the treasure although the priestes before his comming had hidden part thereof which could neuer be founde yet a great part was carried away This vallie is verie fruitful rich and ful of trees abounding with kine and other cattel as also good horses From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca where there is a notable thing to be noted for the strangenesse thereof for it neuer raineth there neither is there any riuer whereby they may conuay the water therwith to water their groundes yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate with fruitfull trees the meanes they haue to helpe themselues therein is thus that they make certaine deepe pits within the earth wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire as also the smal dew and moisture that falleth God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things but no other corne neither would that likewise grow therein if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne which fish they take with nets in the sea and by that meanes it groweth in great aboundance whereby the people maintain themselues The water that they vse to drinke they take it out of great deepe pittes and for the better prouision of their corne they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede both to eate and sowe theyr corne There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition belonging to the King of Peru therein to lodge and rest themselues when they trauaile through their countryes Two miles and a quarter from Ciâ—ca is the prouince of Mala where there runneth a faire riuer the coast whereof is ful of trees and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco well knowne in that countrey being great and broade and ful of fruitful trees speciallie of Guuyas a certaine Indian fruit verie pleasant of smel and taste and also Guauas and Maiz in most great aboundance with al other things as wel Indian as Spanish fruites Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons Turtle Doues and other kindes of foules in the woods and wilde countrey which make a good shadow in the vallie vnder the which there runneth certaine streames of fresh water The inhabitants of this country say that in times past that place was verie populous and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils and ouer plaine countries and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them they held wars against him for foure yeares together minding not to loose the liberty which their predecessors before them had so long maintained During the which wars many strange things happened which are herein needlesse to rehearse because my meaning is not to make a History but onely to describe the coast and although the Kings of Peru in summer time because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built whether he and his nobilitie repaired giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco when he had subdued that people the saide residence of the King and the towne did both decay yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle which he left in signe of victory situate
some narrower accounting the length from Quito to the towne Delia Platta in this country of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles wherein men cannot inhabite the first parte of the hilles are called Andes which are full of great Woods the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in which likewise were not inhabited but beyonde the hilles the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes which are verie colde and are great snow hilles so that there also no man can dwell because of the great colde and aboundance of snow which maketh the ground so soft that nothing can grow therin The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru from Tumbez to Tarapaca where it is so hot that neither water trées grasse nor any liuing creature is seene thereon but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them Nowe Peru beeing so long and scituate in this manner there are many wilde and desart places not inhabited for the causes before rehearsed and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales that by reason of the hils are throwded and defended from the windes and snow wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful so that whatsoeuer is plaÌ„ted therein yéeldeth fruit most aboundantly the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils are wiser stronger and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast and apter to gouerne and for pollicy they dwel in houses made of stone whereof some are couered with earth others with strawe because of the raine whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side haue no care at all couering theyr houses thereby to keepe them from the sun with painted mattes or boughs of trees out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles there runneth many streames of good water into the south sea and moysten the plain countrey of Peru causing many fruitfull Trees corne and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein as I haue already declared Of the people and countries that are therein lieing from Pasto to Quito THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris which is in the land of Quillacinga people without shame and good manners as also they of Pasto little esteemed by their neighbours trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde although they are so neere vnto the line but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way which is no lesse to be wondred at then the way that Hannibal made through the Alpes whereof hereafter I will speak also you passe hard by a riuer vpon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge by nature so artificially made that arte coulde not possibly mend it it is of a high and thick rock in the midle whereof there is a hole through the which with great fury the streame passeth and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it this rocke in their speech is called Luâ—â—châ—ca that is a stone bridge about that place is a fountaine of warme water wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes although the countrie about it and also the riuer are verie colde whereby it is hard trauailing by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle therin to keepe garrison but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs and blacke by them called Mortunnos whereof if any man eateth they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twentie houres From this small countrye of Guaca you come to â—usa where y e prouince of Pasâ—o endeth not farre from thence you come to a little hill wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira where it is very hot an there are many kinds of fruits and certaine faire melons good connies turtle doues and partriges great aboundance of corne barley and maiz from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue before you come thither you must first passe ouer a lake in India called Aguarcocia in our speech the opeÌ„ sea because Guianacapa king of Peru at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled destroyed them all because they had displeased him and threw their bodies into that lake making the water red with their blood The houses of CaraÌ„gue are in a little place wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru all made of stone and also a Temple of the same wherein there was alone 200. maides that serued the temple and are verie narrowly looked vnto that they commit no vncleanes if they did they were cruelly punished and hanged or buried quicke with them also were certaine priests y t offered sacrifices and offerings according to their religious manner This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account being then very carefully looked vnto and greatly honoured wherein was many golde and siluer vessels iewels and treasure the walls being couered with plates of golde and siluer and although it is cleane destroyed yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue with their Captaines who both in time of peace and warre continued there to punish offenders Departing from the houses of Carangue you come to Oâ—aballo which is also rich and mightie and from thence to Cosesqui and before you come thither you must passe certaine snowie hills where it is so colde that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba which is three miles from Quito and because the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line therefore it is there very hot yet not so hot that men cannot dwell therein or that it hindereth the fruitfulnes thereof by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter in some places colde and in some places hot as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people and there many fruites and seeds do grow In this way you passe
courteous and withall verie well apparrelled From thence you goe into another Prouince called Gâ—ancas a goodly countrey both those people of Cachapoia and Guanca are subiect to the Spaniardes of Frontiera as also those of Cascayunga people of another prouince In all those Prouinces the kings of Peru hadde their houses of amunition and in some of them rich mynes of Golde Both men and women in these countreyes go apparrelled In time past they hadde their Temples and offered to theyr Idols and were verie rich of Cattell and made much costlie apparrell for the king as yet at this day they doo and many fine couerlets and carpets In those Prouinces there are manie fruitfull trees and the countries are ful of Wheate and Barlie Touching their ceremonies customes burials and offerings they are like all the other Indians they burie much siluer and golde with their dead and some liuing women they offer vnto the Sunne as I will declare when I write of the Kinges of Peru. This Andes or hill beeing past you come to Maiobamba or Moyobamba another great riuer and some places inhabited From Mayobamba you trauaile to Guanuco a towne inhabited by Spaniardes and lyeth about fortie miles from Cachapoya it is likewise called Leon de Guanuco hauing the name of a Spanish Towne by the commaundement of Vacca di Castio borne in Leon. The scituation of this Towne is verie good and wholsome because the morning and night seasons are verie temperate where also by reason of the temperate aire men liue verie healthfull There they gather much Maiz and other graines Quinces Figges Citrons Lemons and other Spanish fruites as also much of their own country fruit besids this there is much Platain because it is a verie good soyle it is thought the towne will increase for all their kine goates horses and other beasts are kept in the fieldes There are likewise many Partriges Pigeons and other Birds wilde Hawkes and tame therewith to catch the other birdes In the hilles there are some Lions Beares and other wilde beasts and in most parte of the places that are vnder the gouernment of this towne the kings high way doth passe and there are likewise many houses for amunitioÌ„ among those people were certaine southsayers and coniurers that were skilful in the course and nature of the starres in time past there were so many of their countrie sheepe that it was incredible which by meanes of the Spanish warres were most part consumed Their houses are of stone and couered with straw The liuing womeÌ„ in those countries are buried with the dead men and are not so vnchaste as others are In their countrey are good mines of siluer Fortie miles further from Guanuco de Lion lyeth another towne inhabited by the Spaniards and builded on the hils by Francisco Pizarro in the kings name in the yeare of our Lord 1539. and called S. Iohan dila vitoria di Guamanga the cause why it was made was chiefly to cleare the passage betweene Cusco and Lyma from inuasion of the Peruuians before the countrey was wholly subdued by this towne there passeth a riuer of good sweete water to drinke and there are verie faire stone houses and some towers the market place is plain and verie great and there it is a wholsome aire for that neither sunne aire nor elements do any hurt but are verie temperate round about the towne the Spaniards haue their houses for cattell which lie in the vallies vpon the riuers side The greatest riuer that passeth thereabouts is called Vinaque where there are many ruines seene of great foure square pallaces built in other sort then the Peruuians vse to do that make theyr houses long and narrow They say those houses were built in olde time by strange people but what they were they knew not There is likewise goodly wheate whereof they make as good bread as any in Spaine and all kindes of fruites in great aboundance from Guamanga to Cusco are fiue and fortie miles little more or lesse in this way you passe the fields of Chiupas where the cruel battell was fought betwéene Vacca di Castra and Dondiego di Almagro and being eight miles beyond Guamanga lyeth Vilcas which is sayd to be in the middle of all the countreyes that are vnder the gouernment of the Kings of Peru for that Vilcas lyeth in the middle betwéene both and is as farre from Quito as from Chile where also were great and costly houses for the king and a temple of the sunne from whence fiue miles further you keepe on the kings high way to Vramarca whereabouts there is a bridge of two arches verie cunningly made that passeth ouer a riuer in breadth 166. paces The Riuer of Vilcas runneth out of the Prouince of Soras verie fruitful and aboundant in victuals golde and siluer mines and of warlike people apparrelled in wollen clothes and wel esteemed of by the kings of Peru. From thence to Andagnayla vpon the Riuer Abamcay are seuen miles and trauailing sixe miles further you come to another Riuer called Apurimâ— there the wayes are verie badde rough and sharp ouer hils and stony waies dangerous to descend for that many horses laden with gold do stumble and fall into the Riuer so are spoyled from Apurima you come to Maâ—ambo and passing the hilles of Vilca conga you come to Xaqui Xaguana which is verie euen but neither long nor broade in this vallie were certaine goodly houses and pallaces of pleasure for the kings of Cusco who vsed to go thither to recreate themselues and is scarce 4 miles from Cusco through the which also passeth the kings high way and otherwiâ—e it wold hardlie be trauelled as hauing certain moorish grouÌ„ds which crosse the way close by the wals and from thence you come to Cusco in times past the cheefe of all Peru and the whole countrey gouerned by the kings made by Mango Capo the first king of that race in a verie rough and sharpe place compassed with hilles and betweene two small riuers whereof one runneth through the middle of the towne and is inhabited on both sides it hath a vallie on the East side the streame that runneth through the towne taketh her course on the west side in this vally because it is colde there are verie few fruitful trees onely certaine Molles whereof hereafter I will speake because therewith they make their drinke On the north side this towne had a Castle vpon a hil which for the greatnesse and strength thereof was much esteemed but now most part destroyed although the foundation and some towers thereof are yet to be séene it hath likewise on the east and north side the Prouince of Andesuyo and Cinciasuyo on the south side the countreys of Callao and Condesuio vnder the which lyeth Callao betwéene East and South and Condesuyo betweene south and west a part of this Cittie was called Hauan Cusco the other Oren Cusco places where the Noble men and Gentlemen and principall of the
the Compasse that in Portingall lyeth halfe a strike Northeast maketh the same Meridian 100. and so many myles within the countrey of Brasilia which also likewise doth so agrée with the sea In this course aforesaide you see many birdes called Rabos Forcados that is hanging tailes and by all the Islandes of Martin Vaas you shal sée white Garagiaus or sea Mewes Now when you come vnder the height aforesaide hauing a large winde and that you might saile East Southeast let the Compasse wind a strike or a strike and a halfe which will wind so much comming vnder 30. degrées and although the Compasse windeth a strike and a halfe yet you shall not therefore reckon any abatement in your course more then halfe a strike for this way is a strike shorter then it is placed in the sea Carde and vse all the meanes that you runne not higher then two and thirtie or 33. degrées towards the Island of Tristan da Cunha for you shal haue a better and surer course from very foule weather and lesse stormes for commonly for the most part you haue the winde there at North Northeast which to auoid take this counsel giueÌ„ by me because I haue well tried it to be true and comming by the aforesaide Islandes of Tristan de Cunha you shall sée some of the weed called Sargosso driuing vppon the water with diuers Trombas which are thicke peeces of reedes which when you see then you are beside the Islandes you shall there likewise see great sea Rauens and some small Rauens with white billes which flie close by the Islands and when you are right south and north with the Islandes then the winding of the compasse Northeastward beginneth to diminish and lieth but a strike and â— part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Iland you are in the middle or halfe way of the Meridian betweene Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas also herewith you must vnderstaÌ„d that vnder the height of 35. degrees little more or lesse you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compasse from the Northeast and when you see the tokens aforesaid you must runne to 35. degrees and â— which is a good height holding your course east and east and by north till you be within 100. miles of the cape de Bona Speranza then the compasse will winde no more but â— part of a strike likewise the water wil there draw you northwest or north now if by negligence you chance to faile or by the windes are driuen vnder 35 degrees then when you are 30 or fortie miles from the cape de Bona Speranza you shall see many thicke peeces of reedes and sea wolues which being vnder 36. degrees you shall not see bee it full or scarse and comming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza be it vnder 36. or 35. degrées you shall see a gathering or running together of the water that is in the day time for by night if you cannot see it because that when you are once in it then you cannot perceiue it there you find many birdes sitting vpon it by the Portingalles called Cauoitoijns and from thence to the Cape there are some sea Rauens with white billes which is a great signe for it may be you may find ground and neuer sée the birdes called Alcatrases and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza from fiue and thirtie to thirtie degrées then you shall find muddie grounde to the Cape das Agulhas and when you are past that muddie ground you shall finde a kinde of yellowish ground and somewhat more inwarde by the Cape das Vacquas which is towards the Agua de de San Bras you haue shelly and stone ground The Compasse as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas must in Lisbone be marked or striked and must there lie a halfe strike Northeastward which they must very well know howe to marke although some of our Pilots thinke it not necessary to knowe how much the Compasse turneth or lyeth Northeast or Northwest saying that our predecessors vnderstoode not the Compasse and so marked the coast whereunto I answere that in some nauigations it may be excused but in most part of the voiage or nauigation it is very necessarie specially from the Northeast and Northwest as you must saile from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique as wel in the course as to saile in the middle betwéen the Ilande of Saint Laurence Soffala it must haue a strike from the Northwest to saile in the middle of the channell and this is necessarie to be known by al pylots that saile to India because oftentimes they find themselues sometimes vpon the Islandes some-that by meanes of the streames and wa-times vppon the bankes of Soffala and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas to Mosambique it is good to saile an hundred miles Eastward thereby to shun the coast because of the water and streames that runne southwestwarde and comming north and south with the Bay called Balâ—a Del Goa then the Needle of the Compasse will be 1 â— part of a strike and no lesse Northwestwarde from whence notwithstanding you must not goe néerer then 60. miles vnto the coast continuing your course as I sayde before to kéepe your selfe off from it from this place the Rauens with white billes will follow you vntill the Cape das Correntes be Northwest from you and so when the said Cape lyeth right vppon that strike then the Rauens will leaue you for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes to the Cape de bona Speranza being North and south with the point aforesaid then the Compasse will bee 1\â— of a strike rather more then lesse Northwestwarde and in the middle of the channell a whole strike Comming by the droughts of Os Baixos de Iudia being Westward from them or not séeing theÌ„ then you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases that being 10. or 15. miles from them but being 20. miles off on the same side you shall likewise sée some but the compasse will not winde a full strike but if you were on the side of the Iland of S. Laurence within 10.12 or 15. miles then peraduenture you may not sée them and when in the height of those droughtes which lie full vnder 28. degrées you sée the birdes called Alcatrases then passe not by the side of the Iland of S. Laurence for that on that side towards the Iland you shall not see them but hard by and on Soffala side you shal perceiue them 20. miles from the land this is to bee vnderstood at the time of the Monsons which is at the time that the Portingall shippes that depart from thence in the month of March do passe by for they that come in the Monson or winter time may possiblie not find them for that it happened vnto me that comming in the Monson of winter in companie
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
to say truth there are none Those Islandes being past it is good to take your course Southwest till you come to foure degrees and from thence south southwest to three degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place The compasse lieth northwest a strike and a halfe beeing vnder three degrees on the south side of the line then you begin to haue the thunder out of the west and northwest with a stiffe winde and from thence you shall hold south and south by west to ten or twelue degrees in which you shal haue the wind southeast vnder these twelue degrees the compasse holdeth northwestward a strike and â— parts but shall not therfore be made any abatement in your reckoning for it is often found that the water or streame doth there run to the west which would then be two faults for that as I vnderstand it in this course you must account all that is said the ship hath gone because you shall likewise find streames that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees as I said before til you be vnder 15. degrees theÌ„ you haue the winde sometime south southeast then you must not lie westward for it is not good but rather runne east and east southeast alwaies keeping good watch to the eightéenth degrée vnder the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉 Baxios dos Garagiaus and hauing a south-East wind then it is good to hold your course southwest vntill you discouer the Island of Diego Rodâ—ges and if it lieth right before you then you shall sée some of the birdes called Alcatrases and some hearbes called Saâ— driuing in the water and there the compasse goeth no higher but beginneth from thence againe to diminish or lessen when you are past this Island or the point thereof then runne southwest and southwest and by west to 26. degrees vnder the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence as soone as you are vnder this height then you shall hold your course west southwest to 29. degrees and from thence west and west and by south and to know when you are north and by south with the Island of Saint Laurence that is with the middle of the vttermost land on the south side then marke the compasse well and if you bee by the countrey aforesaid then your compasse will bee a strike and 1 â— one from the other northwestward from thence you shall hold your course as winde and weather serueth for being from about the 15. of Aprill till the last of May it is necessary to haue the Firme land on boarde for that there at those times you haue the winde North and northwest and being in the monthes of Februarie and March then the winde is east and south where you must rule your course as the wind serueth and being right with the land north south then the compasse shall leaue a strike rather more than lesse to the Northwest which is a certaine signe to bee right against it but if it be more then assure your selfe you are not by the land then beeing 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land you shall see gréene water but you finde no ground The compasse that I speake of shall be sixe and euen at the Cape das Agulhas with those that make them leane northeastward in Portingall a halfe strike rather lesse then more and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas and hetherwards as long as you haue not muddie ground you are not at the Cape das Agulhas wherefore spare not often to cast your lead for it will be for your owne good Passing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza it is not good to saile northwest as long as you haue ground for that therewith you should not passe the Cape de Bona Speranza but being past it then runne northwest til you come to 16. degrees vnder the which height the Island of Saint Helena doth lie or to 16. degrees and 1 â— and when you come to that height then run west and somewhat southerlie or the first meale tide west and by south because of the compasse of the sea in some streames for I thinke you shall finde no more heights although you should sayle west and by south and sayling on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further but no more and when you perceiue the Island and cannot reach it by day then strike all your small sayles holding about 5. miles from thence in such manner that in the night time you hold west and west and by north there the compasse beareth full northeast halfe a strike and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza to this Island with the aduantage of the compasse as it ought to be you shall find that it lieth aboue seauentie miles more westward then it standeth in the Sea Card departing from this Iland to saile to Portingall and to sée the Iland called Ascention you shall run northwest and northwest and by west for 70. miles then you shal goe somewhat Easternly as some doe then it wil be needful to saile 100. miles northwest and by west and from thence northwest vntill you come by the generall wind but come no nearer vnto the land for then you should not make a good voiage and although the south winde doth continue longer in this course which bringeth you to twelue fourtéene degrées on the north side yet leaue it not for that neyther put close vnder the coast of Guinea when you haue the general wind although you might more westernly neyther leaue off therefore to follow your course for it will be large enough althougl sometimes it scanteth because you are close by the land It is good to kéepe 150. or 200. miles from the coast for although that by the sea cardes you finde your selfe to bee two hundred miles from the land notwithstanding you are a good way nearer the reason whereof is that you sayle from the point of the Island of S. Helena which lieth in the sea carde and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles westward as aforesaid and although the pointes doe assuredly lie towards the Island Flores it therfore maketh no reason that it is not so as I say for that in the course through the sea where you finde the hearbe Sargosso the winde being there alwaies northeast the sea or streame runneth to the Antilhas or fore Iland of the Spanish Ilandes whereby the ships doe so little multiplie in the course of Sargosso if these waters and streames doe chance to meete the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso it happeneth often times that the ships beare too loofeward but very seldome and it happeneth oftentimes that by Guinea the streame runneth northward and being somewhat neere the land then the water draweth you presently to the land also the
not suddainely vppon you for it by vnaduisednes it should fall forwards vpon you it were not possible for you to find any meanes to keepe your selfe from being ouerwhelmed in the sea without the speciall fauour of God for that they come with most great furie and outragiously but if you chance in the beginning of Februarie to bee by the furthest point of S. Laurence 70. or 80. miles inward to the Sea then take your course to the Cape Das Agulhas for then you shall find the windes alwaies Southeast so you passe not further into the Sea then 36. degrees which Nauigation you shall make departing out of India in the ninth of December you haue ground by the Cape Das Agulhas at twentie and twentie fiue miles from the land at a hundred and a hundred and thirtie Fadome déepe vnder thirtie sixe degrees and a halfe The 9. Chapter The Nauigation or course from Monte Deâ—â—n to Portingal which is the chiefe hill in India and lyeth in the countrie of Malabar sixe miles Northwarde from Cananor and from Goa sixtie one miles Southward DEparting from the hill or Monte Delijn towards Portingall by the way without the Iland of Saint Laurence so set you Northeast southwest with the hill Monte Delijn taking your course East and East and by South and then you shall come by an Iland lying vnder 10. degrées and a halfe fiftie miles from Monte Delijn and then you must take your course Southwest and Southwest and by West and then you shal come 25. miles beyond this Iland vnder the hight of 9. degrées and frac34 taking care not to goe more southward towardes the Iland of Maldiua from whence halfe a mile it is déep and faire and as soone as you are past this Iland whether it be early or late in the yeare then runne southwest and southwest and by South vntill you haue past the line and if there you finde the wind West then runne South and South and by West if you can if not southward which is a good way and in this course you hold fréely without feare if in this course from 13. degrées vpwards you find diuers Birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies together feare not therefore to follow your course being late in the yeare then alwaies keepe on the South side thereby to auoide the drougthes called Oâ— Baixos de Lopo Soares and Garagiaus lying vnder 16. degrées holding this course you may boldly sayle both by day and night for you shall find no let as I my selfe haue well tryed The 16. degrées not being past you must also passe betweene the drougthes aforesaid and the Iland of Brandaon and comming to the hight there loose a nights sayle to bee the surer and make your account that when you find many Birdes called Garagiaus with other speckled Birdes among them flying in companies together then you are 40. miles beyond the Ilande from whence you shall saile southwest and southwest and by South for certaine meale tides and it being early in the yeare when you set sayle from India then auoide all those Ilands and drougthes and take your course to Sea wards towards the Cape Das Agulhas and if it chance that about the seuenth of Februarie you find your selfe 100. miles little more or lesse from the furthest point of the Iland of S. Laurence that is vnder his hight as I haue béene then runne West southwest vntill you bee vnder the hight of the Cape de Bona Speranza take héede to the streame that might deceiue you because there in Februarie they runne verie swift by reason of the East windes which as then blow verie swiftly so runne your course to the Cape de Bona Speranza till you be vnder 36. degrées and a halfe and when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then looke when it is noone by the Astrolabe and if as then it is likewise noone by the sunne Diall or not wanting aboue the thicknesse of a thréede then it is a good signe as well outward as comming backe to Portingall for ther the néedles of the Compasse are right and a like and being vpon the one side or the other they will lie either Northeast ward or Northwest ward as you are past the Meridionall line and so much it differeth from equalitie with the Sunne Diall also when you come to the Cape Das Agulhas or further forward then looke vpon the water and if it be gréene then turne backe againe vnder 36. degrées and a halfe and cast foorth your Lead and you shall find 30. fadome deepe and being vnder 36. degrées 2 â— degrées you shall find 90. fadome and then you shall not sée many blacke Rauens with white billes nor Alcatrases but on both sides of the Cape Das Agulhas you shall sée many both on the coast and 20. miles to Sea ward but not further and you shall find the water so that you be not vpon the depthes aforesaid light and gréenish as also some of the Sas-been driuing in the water and as soone as you haue found grounds without séeing the land of Cape de Bona Speranza then runne still along by this ground till you loose it and then bee assured that you are past the Cape Das Agulhaas then holde your course West Northwest and so you shall find 12. miles from the Cape and when you begin to leaue it then you shall begin to sée thicke Reedes swimming vppon the water for the space of ten or fiftéene miles from thence In the course aforesaid and when you sée them it is a good tooken and you may be assured to haue past the Cape de Bona Speranza when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then marke the Sunne Diall and the water of the ground and they will shew you when you are there for by this Cape the néedles of the Compasses are fix and euen and within or without that Cape they lie either Northeastward or Northwest ward as I said before the Nauigation from the Cape de Bona Speranza to Portingal is without danger to the Equinoctiall for that you alwaies find a Southeast wind and from the line to Portingall it is dayly sayled whereby it is commonly knowne to euerie simple Pilot yet such as are desirous to know it may sée it in this Booke where it is set downe as also in mine owne Viage from India to Portingall where it is particularly declared till you come to the towne of Lisbone The 10. Chapter Of the right tokens and knowledge of the Cape Das Correntes and the Ilands as Ilhas Premeiras and of all the Hauens and coasts of Mosambique THe bankes of Soffala begin at the Cape de S. Bastian and reach to the Ilands Primeras all along the coast and the coast lyeth North and South to Soffala and hath somwhat of North and West South and East herein are some ryuers but onely fit for small shippes the ryuer called Mataca or Monemone lyeth vnder 21. degrées and a
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra holding your course as aforesaide towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare because the monson or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent you shall doe your selfe great hurt and procure great hinderance in your Voyage the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground and in some places sand and passing by the Iland of d'Aru then you find from 40. to 50. fadome déepe from the Islandes of Pulo Sambilao to th Islands of Pulo Pinao you shall kéepe along by the shore not once putting from it shunning a banke lying right ouer against the land called Barus betwéene Pulo Sambilao and Pulo Pinao which is muddie ground and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water you shall still vse your lead and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward because diuers times there commeth great blasts out of the hilles of Queda from Northeast and north northeast and sometimes sharper many times runne further from the coast as I said before and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao and being by them or at the heigth and length of them and hauing the monson that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pera which is a good course but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum it is better for from this place you must take your course towards the channell vnder 7. degrées and ½ but hauing the monson as aforesaid although it be somewhat backeward you shall loose your time for the monson at the first is sometimes sharpe and after that beginneth to be larger as you turne or winde from the land or coast With this course you shall runne to the channell and passe it vnder seauen degrées and ◠2 and before you come vnder seauen degrées and 1 2 to seauen and 2 ◠or lesse hauing past the Ilands you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½ because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north and north Northeast in your course towards the Island of Seylon you shall runne vnder seauen degrees and ½ and vnder seauen degrees with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon to a place called Matecalou which lieth too loofeward off the sands there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land you must likewise vnderstand that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest whereunto you must haue great regard and béeing at the Island Seylon hauing it in sight you shall not loose it but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome looking well before you and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous the foremost of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley without any other then only those you sée to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome and in the halfe way or middle thereof and the land you shall finde the depth aforesaid and another Sand that lyeth behind you which is the first and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it and they say you may passe with small Shippes betweene it and the land béeing foure fadome déepe but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward it is from thence to the land a mile and you may goe neare it at sixtéene eightéene fadome and if you fall vppon it by night you must saile onlie with your Foukesayle when you are in sight of vnknowne land kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land and not aboue thirtie fadome to Seaward from this sand you shall runne along y e coast at fiftéene sixtéene twentie twentie fiue and thirtie fadome but in such manner that you loose not ground for you may haue a Calme and so by that loosing of ground the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua wherefore you must haue good regard vntill you come to Negumbo which is in the Island of Seylon and from thence it is good to crosse ouer to the Firme land and comming to Negumbo you shall not put off from the land vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie for from that time forwardes then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes and being from the fiftéene of Februarie forwardes you may put from the shore that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon to the Portingales Fort called Columbo as it falleth out best for you least it happen to you as it hath done to many other shippes that for want of care were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua from this last sand to Tanadare and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla along the Coast and sea side the Countrie is almost all of one higth and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land you see 3 high trees and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands and you may still runne along the shore without feare till you sée Tanadare which is verie well knowne and deceaue not your self for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla but the markes and right tokens thereof are that it hath a thyn point of land striking out in forme lyke a tongue with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea as farre as you may throw a stone this point of land or tongue striking out is full of Indian Palme trees which shew verie faire and a myle or two before you come at it this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees further into the sea but the Palme trees are thicke and shew verie faire and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes not necessarie to be described and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles from this Pagode towardes the North syde you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth which are good markes and the right knowledge of that Countrey you must not goe too close vnto the shore for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea but not farre when you see the downes aforesayd then you must runne at eyghtéene twentie fadome déepe for that if the wind beginneth to calme and your ground to
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
and when you begin to come neere them theÌ„ you shall keep towards Pedra BraÌ„ca and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes for two causes the one because the windes at that tyme when you sayle to China doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest and if the winde should scant and fall into the Southeast as often tymes in those countries it happeneth being on the syde of the Ilandes you could not passe by the Riffes whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca and the Ilandes or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there and that the Monson that is the tyme of your voyage to China would bee spent the other is that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde or with few sailes spred then the streames would driue you vpoÌ„ the Riffes before you could auoyde them as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses whose Pilot was Goâ—â—alo Vieâ—a who by the water was driueÌ„ vpoÌ„ 10. fadome where he ankered and then after he came to 7. fadom where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca or the white cliffes aforesaid FroÌ„ Pedra Branca to the IlaÌ„d Pulo Tâ—nge y t run north south north by east south and by west the course is 13. miles this IlaÌ„d is high and rouÌ„d hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées it lieth by the coast of the firm land betwéene it y e firm land there is good sayling but it is not Oorbaer this IlaÌ„d lieth with Pulo TimoÌ„ northeast southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pulo Tinge you shall take your course from Pedra Branca a great myle Eastward and from thence North and north and by East alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes being at 14 fadome being as you gesse in that country you shal presently kéepe off from it into the sea being before it you néed not feare any thing but y t you sée before your eyes in this course to Pulo Tinge in the sight of the Iland there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands which shal lie on the land side froÌ„ you and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon the IlaÌ„d of Pulo Timon is great high and on the side whereunto you sayl are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes ankers because in those countries they vse such kind of wooddeÌ„ ankers and it is commonly couered with mistes clouds and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground therein are 2 places wher you find good fresh water one being on the side of the land in the middle of a long strand a little inward to the land where you find a good réed but wheÌ„ you come early thereunto as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly it is dangerous to anker there because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place where you likewise find fresh water on the East side towards the sea ruÌ„ning right vpon the face of the Iland along by the East side and being past a certain houel that maketh a hooke you shal find a sandy Bay where you must enter into the land and when the point or hooke lieth southeast you may anker where you may lie for the Momson and there you shal haue 20 fadome déepe there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish and in the same bay there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea also on that syde you haue much better wood néerer to fetch there you ly safe from west winds on that side of the land you haue certain IlaÌ„ds along the coast from the north point of this IlaÌ„d Pulo TimoÌ„ about the shot of a great péece there lieth an other Iland and by the South point an other likewise about 3 miles south eastward ther lieth 3 other Ilands wherof y e one is great rouÌ„d y e other 2 being somwhat smaller are called Pulo Laor the Iland of Pulo TimoÌ„ lieth vnder 2 degr â…” on y e north side of the Equinoctial 12 miles northwest ward stroÌ„ it lieth the riuer Pan in the firme land ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward there lieth a small Iland hauing an euen round trée in the middle half a mile froÌ„ it it is 6 fadom déep grouÌ„d FroÌ„ Pulo TimoÌ„ to Pulo Condor the course is North northeast Westsouthwest 115 miles Pulo CoÌ„dor lieth vnder 8 degr â…” it is a great IlaÌ„d with high hils hauing close by it 5 or 6 Ilands and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle it is ouer al good grouÌ„d at 10 or 12 fadome déepe and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water it lieth north and south with the riuer of Camboia which is called the hauen of Malaios 12. miles distant but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther for wheÌ„ it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and northwest w t some thunder whereby you may not stay with one sayle only for that being without sayles it would strike you to ground and cast your ship away when it is early in the yeare theÌ„ you haue East winds From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y u shal alwaies find ground at 35 38 fadome and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor you shall sayl north northeast not accounting any winding of the compas for if y u should do so you should run on the south side to seaward and run by without séeing it which is an euill course for that y e winds alwaies in this course doe blow froÌ„ the side of the land and if it chance that before you sée the IlaÌ„d Pulo Condor you find y e water thicke troubled foule then cast out your lead you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water with a soft muddy ground so runne half a strike in that course til you come to 17 fadome and being there then rune northeast and being at 1 1 6 fadome before you sée the Iland theÌ„ hold your course East East and by north alwaies at 16 fadome déepe whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor full of bushes a mile or thereabouts distant from each other and if it be possible you shall
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast and Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
inward with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid lying on the north point of the aforesaid créeke it is in crossing ouer twelue miles as you begin to see the coast on the other side lying before the créeke northwarde the Iland stretching in that sort as I said before being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian as aforesaid and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands one running through the other along the coast these Ilands haue no trees are of red earth and comming to the end of these Ilands then put to the shore vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you then take your course right North wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian which lyeth froÌ„ these Ilands 10. miles distant The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees without any sandy strands but altogether of soft muddie ground dirte hath likewise a banke of muddie ground reaching two miles and a halfe southward wheÌ„ you enter first vpon this bank it is hard muddie ground you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground ther is no danger for you must come vpon drie land to put out or in with the tides comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian in manner as I said before sailing northward as they ly southward from you being in the night time you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer against the hauen so that you shall plainly sée it for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground all with the tides and south winds which will bring you vpwards at pleasure The 23. Chapter Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon Pedra Branqâ—â— DEparting from the point of y e haueÌ„ of Camboia being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea you shal hold your course Southwest whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying betweene Pulo Coâ—dor and Pulo Wy from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest not once putting Southward because of y e strong streams y t run to y e Iland of Bornon and if the wind begin to be calme and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe you may well doe it for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe therfore leaue not sayling Southwest ward for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great high and full of trées and hath verie good fresh water and if you néede there you may haue it right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon on the Northeast point you shall sée a round Iland and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland or betwéen it and the Firme land you may wel do it for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place and comming to Pulo Tymon you shall hold your course South and somwhat South and by West towards Pulo Tynge which is a verie high rounde Iland much like a Doune or a sheafe of Corne it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South and South and by West you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe from thence you begin the course to Sincapura running about thrée or foure miles Westward The 24. Chapter Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon the straight of Sincapura WHen you depart from Macau to y e other coast you must put out at the East chanel if the wind bee Northwest if not then you cannot passe that way but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel which is a good way to passe out running from the point of Varella right vnto the land on the other side of Macau to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side then you shall runne along to a point of land which is the end thereof where the Iland of Castro lyeth from this point the banke hangeth off for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro then to the point of land that you runne not on ground for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand and the depthes on the right hand with a spring tide at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe and being without the banke you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole running as then to the point of the banke to shunne the Cliffes which will presently bee seen for that the water breaketh vpon them vntill they be on your right hand being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following and hauing also departed from Varella being a Harquebush shot from thence you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio that of the Meercatte and being ouer against it passe close by it for it is a good way for the north winds which you find there abouts and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast to the Iland of Castro and when you are out of the chanell you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon and when you are within eight miles of it being to Seaward from it then you haue good sayling for I doe alwaies hold this course and passe well with it being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon you shall runne Southwest for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands and being there you shal then runne Southwest so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon and then againe running South southwest and South South and by West by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind being in sight of the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir and hauing a bad wind not being North then the time will shew you what you haue to doe when you see those Ilands you may goe neere them if you will for it is faire cleare sandie ground at fifteene Fadome from thence to Pulo Cambir the coast runneth
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
you shal still sayl with your lead in hand and when you find 15. or 16. fadom thē you are at the end of the riffe and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pedra Branca and comming to 18. fadome then put no further to the sea and running in that sort till you sée Pedra Branca running as then to the poynt of the land that you shall sée on the land of Iantana which is the land on the North side which you shall passe along by till you come to see redde Houels lying at the Hauen of Ior and before you come to the hauen of Ior you shall hold off from it not putting into the hauen for there lyeth a Banke but you must passe the redde Houels and runne towardes the land which is a sandie strand and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Branca you runne to the land of Iantana without turning to the other side for there it is verie bad ground and the wind would hinder you to get ouer and if you desire to run on the inside of the Iland Pulo Tymon you may wel doe it The 25. Chapter The course from Malacca to Sunda lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior with the situation of the countrie SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa your course lieth Northwest Southeast and Northwest and by west and southeast and by east which is 13. miles all this way if you will you may anker and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe good muddy ground This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca within the entry on the Southeast side hath high land and on the Northwest side low land it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde keeping from the Northwest for ther you shall find shallowes From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon which lyeth in the same Coast a myle from the land aforesayd you runne Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by north and Southwest and by south betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd and the course is 6 miles from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon which is a great and high land with trees with some Ilands round about it you runne North and south and north and by west and South and by east and are distant 5. miles from the Iland Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra you must make towardes this Iland and from thence run along by it on the west syde for it is good way On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth certain Ilandes from these Ilandes two myles forward lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon there the channell is at the narrowest From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon that is y e straight or narrow passage of Sabon and being as farre as that Iland you shall hold about half a mile from it from Alonalon to the great Iland of Sabon are about 2 miles in the middle of this channel there lieth other smal Ilands that shall all lie on the East side from you hauing good regard not to fall vpon them whē you run through this channel you must be aduertised that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe vnder the water whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther Comming by the Iland Alanolon on the Southwest thereof that is on the syde of Sumatra you shal see two small Ilands with an other somewhat lesse full of trées bee all rampard with certaine cliffes lying by them and whē those Ilandes are southwest south west by west frō you thē you shal hold your course South where you shall find nyne fadome water alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon which is the east syde for it is shallow but run in the middle of the channel for it is good ground half a mile off from the Iland Sabon lieth a small Iland called Pulo Pandha this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you thē hold your course southward and you shal find 9. fadome deepe running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past you shall find hard ground holding your course South vntill the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker if you will and when the aforesayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd then on the West syde you shall see two Ilandes or Cliffes whereof the first hath some trees and the other which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar in the Iland of Sumatra hath no trées they close one to the other from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward as I saide before holding your course along the coast of Sabon about halfe a mile from it where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground vntill you come to a small Iland lying hard by the coast of Sabon hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it you shall keepe outwarde from it leauing it on the side of Sabon there likewise you haue muddie ground and the shot of a great péece further off the depthes will presently begin to lessen to seuen and sixe fadome and ½ from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra right in the face of this point about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes which at full sea cannot be séene they are called Batotinge betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe and betwéene them both nyne fadome you may passe with a shippe betweene them and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe to make towards these cliffes and also to passe by them you shall take your course as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do passing along by Sabon with your lead in your hand at seuen sixe ½ ◠fadom deep and thether the depths will lessen being all muddie ground which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon and with a point of the lande of Sumatra being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar called As Bocas de Campar from whence the one land lyeth with the other East and West in this country are
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes This entry is of fiue fadome déepe but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it therfore you must bind it fast or cast out ankers both before and behind From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles hauing some small Islands in the way On the firme land West Northwestward there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast fiue miles beyond the Island which is a riuer called Tinay at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe without any sands or shallowes These two Islands aforesaid of Synogicam where the Portingals vsed to traffike lie vnder 29 degrees and 2 â— and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vnder one and thirtie degrées Northward and are not as the Islands of Canton hauing their Channell faire and cleare without feare of any thing but that you sée before your eies But betwéene these Islands in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe and a third part at a flood wherefore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the many channels and droughts which runne verie strong and with so great force that oftentimes they driue a man vpon the point and Hookes of the Island when hée would passe by it Wherefore hée that will sayle by these Islands must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey To Seaward from these Islands it is all faire and good ground Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde that is from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes to Sea-ward you must alwaies runne close by it and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward then it maketh a point sticking out and before you come to this Point there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle being inward of a clouen stonie Rocke at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece The smal Island shall lye on the North side and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it so that if you were close by it it would draw you in as it happened vnto mee whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out From this Island halfe a myle Northward there beginneth another great and high Island which from thence reacheth Eastward making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere but from thence to the point of the other North Island and from both these Islands Westward which is a great space of the Sea it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water that reach vnto the Channell that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes along by the Islands that lye on the land side Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid lying on the same Island From the Island where you may Winter for the North winds there runneth a channell North Northeastward betwéene the Islands so that it deuideth the Islands leauing some on the land side and some to Sea-ward which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self From this Island aforesaid where you may Winter for the North windes fiue myles further forward in the same course there beginneth another great and high Island of fiue myles long lying in the same course of North Northeast and South Southwest This Island is very populous of euill natured people from the South point of this great Island the length of a Cannon shot Eastward there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away laden with Pepper and other Spices which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide you must runne on the West side close by the Island From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast there is yet another great and high Island and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built wherefore by the Portingales it is called A Ilha de Varella that is the Island of the marke or token and before you come at it you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side and the great Island of fiue miles long reacheth behind these Islands to land ward and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell the whole Channell from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea and that of Varella as also the month of the chanell which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea is all deep In the entery of the Channell of this Island at the foote of Varella it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other reaching East and West which Islands also are named after the name of Varella whereby the Channell is knowne This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lyeth full vnder thirtie degrées and is distant from the Islands Sâ—ongâ—â—â—m aforesaid eight miles From the Islands Sâ—ongicam eleuen or twelue myles it is altogether great and high Islands lying close by each other but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separated At the end of these Islands there lyeth two Islands together whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour it is called Lepion they lye close by a great Riuer which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people In this Hauen of Lepion the Iapons doe often Trafficke from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground for that
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
haue stopped their mouthes with money There wée vnderstood that the Island of Guoto hath sixe or seuen Hauens that are very good running from the one side to the other but the Hauen aforesaid had no issue but so much pleasure it did vs that there we had the new Moone which was the first of March and the third day wee set sayle againe it being Shroue Tuesday with a North Northeast winde and a verie cléere morning and béeing out wée helde our course Southwest following on our course wherewith wée sawe the Island Meaxuma and the Pannellas or Pots lying South Southeast from vs wée tell right vpon the middle thereof Those Panellas are two small stones and Meaxuma is an Island and when you are Northeast and Southwest right ouer against it it sheweth like two or three Islands wherof that on the Northeast side is long and the greatest and sheweth as if it had a Cliffe This Island is the longest but not verie high and that in the middle is small hauing thrée sharp points like Organ pipes with a Cliffe likewise lying Northeastward The other Island on the Southwest side is round and plain stéepe lande shewing higher then all the other and séemeth to haue Cliffes round about it On the other side lie the Panellas aâ—oresaide and although I said before they are but two stones yet they are three two standing togither and the other somewhat further from them and lie with the Island Meaxuma Northwest and Southeast From thence forward wee held our course to China and Macau in such manner as I shewed in another place and hereafter once againe I will declare The 41. Chapter Another voiage made out of the Hauen of Langasaque from the Island of Iapon to Macau in China in the Santacrus the Gunner being Diricke Geriâ—son of Enckehusâ—n in Ann. 1586. THE 20. of March we departed out of the Hauen of Langasaque it being the first day of the newe Moone vpon a Thursday with a northeast and North Northeast winde and by nine of the clocke in the morning wée were as farre as the Island dos Cauallos running West Southwest and being two myles beyond the Island Dos Cauallos wee had a calme and then the wind came Northwest in such sort that wee ranne Southwest and Southwest and by west and sometimes halfe a strike with a slacke winde The next day in the morning we saw the Islands of Corequyn and Guoto and about eight of the clock in the forenoone we saw the Island Meaxumâ— so that we sawe those three Islands all at once and about twilight we were east Southeast and West Southwest with the Island of Meaxuma and so helde our course Southwest hauing a hard Northeast wind with raine the aire being very darke and close yet the Rackes came out of the Southwest Vpon Sunday we cast out the Leade and found somewhat more then forty fadome water muddye ground and was about forty myles from Meaxuma This depth is a banke lying in the middle way betwéene the Island Meaxuma and Cabo de Suâ—â—bor in the firme land of China Vpon munday the foure and twentith day wée tooke not the height of the sunne because we saw it not hauing so small a winde that the ship might stéere vpright and because we made little way wee cast out the lead and found forty fadome muddy ground this was at noone and at night about sunne setting we cast it out againe and founâ— fiue and fifty fadome whereby we perceiued that wee began to passe ouer a banke at that time we had all one wind being Northeast and North North-east with a good blast and yet the clouds came South-west and South South-west so strong that they put vs in feare doubting the wind would be there but we had certaine men in our shippe that had seene and found it so in that place and yet no alteration whereby they put vs in some comfort in such sort that wee followed on our course with that wind Vpon Tuesday at noone wée tooke the height of the Sunne not full nine and twenty degrées hauing not long before as I gessed marked one point in the Card and estéemed that wee had sayled a hundred myles from the Hauen of â—angasaque but by the Sunne it was not so The sixe and twenty being Wednesday wee tooke not the heigth of the sunne because it was a close day but wee had a good Northeast wind and made good way so that wee seemed to make thirtie myles â—n one mealetide but I made account but of fiue and twenty myles because wee thought the ship sailed not ouer fast that day we sawe many Cuttle bones driuing vpon the water held our course Southwest till morning and because the winde beganne to bee stiffe I thought it good to make towards the land to know it therefore as day appeared wee ran West till it was euening without knowing Land by reason of the mistineâ—â—e of the aire but by the depths our gessing wee thought wee were about 5 or 6 miles from the land our depth was 37 fadome and being towards night with cloudy weather we ran southwest and southwest and by south all that night and when day came being thursday wee gessed to bee ouer against the Lagaâ—to or Crocodille a cliffe so called about fiue or sixe miles to Seaward from it but wee found it to be somewhat more Thursday being the seuen and twenty as soone as day appeared we ranâ—e West towards the Land and about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we saw the land being the Islands Dos Camaroâ—s that is the Islands of Granata those Islanâ—s are not too high as soone as we saw them wee helde our course South Southwest and hauing sailed a little way we saw another round Island called Ilha do Bâ—boxâ—â— which lay right before vs as soone as wee saw it we presently ran South to shun it because we were not aboue a quarter of a mile from it there wee found so strong a streame and course of water which ranne with vs that in short time we were two or three myles from the aforesaid Island in such manner that all that night wee ranne South and South and by West and South Southwest and when the moone rose we held our course southwest The eight and twenty being Friday about morning we began to runne West Southwest west and west and by South and at noon or thereabouts we cast out the Lead and found nine and twenty fadome muddy ground and running so with that course for a little time we saw land but it was so close and misty that we could not know it but about two or three of y e clock in the afternoone it began to cleare vp and then we knew it to be the Island of Chinchon being North from vs and there wee cast out the Lead and found nineteene fadome water sandy ground and not long after we sawe the whole coast and firme Land of China and so we ran all
night at the depths of ninetéene twenty and two and twenty fadome with so clear bright a sky that almost all the night we saw the coast and when day began to appear we were somwhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo and presently thervpon we saw the Island of Lamon there we beganne to haue certain stormes as I gesse it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo to the Island of Lamon ten miles by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shynne and burne to Seaward in such sort that wee passed close by the Riffe those that come from Iapon must first passe by the Island and then by the Riffe this Riffe lieth Northeast southwest and is dangerous for those that saile from Macau to Iapon we ran about thrée miles from it with a strong northeast and East Northeast winde so that wee made good way whereby it séemed we made fifty miles in one meale tide but the strēgth of y e water and streames against vs were so stiffe that we sailed but fiue and twenty myles in a mealetide This strong streame and stiffe water commeth as we were informed out of the Riuer of Tancoan and continueth till you be past the Island Branco being past it the streame runneth presently towards the Island Ilha de Leme which lyeth close by Macau from Lamon we ran West southwest and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco very short for by night wee stroke all our sayles and so lay driuing without sailes winding Southwest alwaies at the depths of fiue and twentie and six and twenty fadome water and at the midnight watch we began to hoise vp our maine saile and our foukesaile in that manner running West to get to twenty fadome deepe which is the middle of the chanell where we must passe through and in the morning we saw the Island Do Leme that is the Island of the harquebush lying somwhat on y e lareboord of vs. This Island Do Leme if you go east and West vpon it séemeth very small and the déeper you are within the channell the bigger it sheweth in the entry wherof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffes and from thence forward the Islands begin to lye on a rowe till you come to Macau as I said in another place The 42. chapter An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in Iapon to the coast of China the hauen of Macau with all the courses situations and stretchings of the same done by a Portingale Pilote HE that desireth to saile from the Island Firando to Macau or Canton in China as soone as he is out of the hauen of Firando if he hath time inough to get to the Island Guoto he must presently saile forward if not hée must anker about a mile from Firando at 28 fadome déepe where hee may prepare himself and make fast his boat y t the next day in the morning he may set saile As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course you must runne along by the land of Firando till you bee at the end thereof and as you run south west vntil you be by the land you shal hold somwhat néerer south-west and then on your West side there will bee 3. or 4. Islands and passing by the formost of them southward you shall presently sée the channell that runneth betwéen that Island and the Island Guoto and through it you must passe By this channel there lieth another Island betwéen the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise passe when you are through and out of this Channell and that the Islands westward from you then you must runne along by Guoto vntil you are past it to seaward so to kéepe on further your course and if in passing through the channel the wind chanceth to be still you may boldly anker therein close by the land of Guoto In this Island Guoto are very good Hauens which passe through and through againe therfore it is not one Island but deuided into foure parts Whē you are two myles from Guoto you must hold your course West Southwest vntill you are past the two Islands one called Xuma y e other Meaxuma which are eight myles distant from the Island of Guoto Being past those Islands you must run Southwest néerer south from the aforesaid Islands there is another Island called Meaxuma which you must likewise passe by by those Islands aforesaid it is all faire way without any trouble neither yet by the Island this Island lyeth vnder 31 degrées and 1 ◠You must run betwéene the Island and the smal Islands and whē you are past them the Island of Guoto then you must runne Southwest southwest and to south When you are past this and the other Islands running southwest as aforesaid you shal goe right vpon the point of Cabo de Sumbor which lieth on y e coast of China vnder 28 degrées ◠◠and if it be clear weather y t you there desire to know the land you may well doe it if not then put not too neer the coast because of the many Islands that lie all along by it for you must runne outward from it alwaies kéeping as far from it as you thinke néedefull that you may be frée from it and by night not to put in betwéene it for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon is nothing but Islands You must likewise sée that you put not too farre inward to Sea to kéepe close to the winds that blowe off the Land and to Sea-ward you haue the Islands of small Lequeo called Lequeo Pequeno and the Island of fishers which are distant from the Firme land about twenty miles if you haue a cléere night you may well passe along by the Islands yet with great foresight The most daungerous Island vpon that coast is the Island of Camaroyns which lyeth to Sea-ward out from all the rest I haue passed twice betwéene it and the Land it is an Island that is deuided in two partes by a rent or breach that is in it Foure myles forward beyond this Island lyeth a small Island which is flat and euen with the Sea hauing certain stones lying Northeastward from it but not many If you chaunce to passe by it in the night time you must bee carefull to auoid it for it is flat and little without any trées you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn which likewise lieth outward into the Sea in such sort that when you fall vpon it with good aduise and warely you may fréely passe by it for you néede feare nothing then what you see before you And when you are fiftéene myles from Cabo de Sumbor accounting from y e point of the firm land and not from the Islands lying by it thē you must hold your course Southwest and so run without all the Islands whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found
or rootes whereof they make bread and because it was late they returned againe vnto their shippe without doing any other thing for that day The next day the said Captaine with the aforesaide twelue men being Harquebushers rowed to land again and set two of their companie on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certaine Indians secretly hidden that fell vpon the two English men and tooke them which they in the boat perceiuing went out to helpe them but they were so assailed with stones and arrowes that all or the most part of them were hurt the Captaine himselfe béeing wounded with an arrowe on the face and will another arrowe in the head whereby they were constrained to turne backe againe without once hurting any of the Indians and yet they came so neare the boate that they tooke foure of their oares from them This done they set saile againe running along the coast with a South winde sailing so for the space of sixe miles passing by the Hauen called Saint Iago or Saint Iames where they put into a Hauen and there they tooke an Indian that lay fishing in a Scute or Canoa giuing him linnen and Butchers chopping kniues with other trifles and not long after there came an other Indian aboord their shippe called Felippe and hée spake Spanish hee gaue the English Captaine notice of a certaine shippe that lay in the Hauen of Saint Iago which they had left sixe miles behinde them with that intelligence the Indian béeing their guide the next day they set Saile and put to the aforesaide Hauen of Saint Iago and entring therein they tooke the saide Shippe wherein they found a thousand seuen hundred and 70. Bortigas of Spanish pots full of wine other thinges which hauing done they leapt on land where they tooke certaine sackes with meale with all whatsoeuer they could find they tooke likewise the ornaments and other Relickes out of the Church wherewith they departed from thence taking the aforesaid shippe with two menne that they found in her with them and so departed from that Hauen which lyeth vnder 32 degrées and ½ running along by the coast till they came vnder one and thirtie and thirty degrées which was the place where they had appointed to méet and there to stay for each other if by tempest or foule weather they chanced to be seperated and so loose each others company And comming vnder thirty degrées they found a very good Hauen wherein they entred and ankered at sixe fadome deepe the shotte of a great Péece from the Lande which was right ouer against a Riuer where they tooke in sixe Pipes of fresh water and to defend them that fetched the water they set twelue men vpon the Land and being busied in filling of their water they espied a company of men comming towards them wherof halfe of them were Spaniards being about two hundred and fifty horsemē and as many footemen but they had no sooner espied them but they presently entered into the Boat and escaped away loosing but one man The same night they set saile againe with both their Shippes running along the coast about ten miles further where they tooke in some fresh water but because they perceiued certaine horsemen they departed without lading any more water Frō thence they folowed on their course along the coast for the space of 30. myles where they entred into a desert or vnhabited Hauen yet they went not on Land for euery day they sawe people vpon the shore and there they made out a small pinnace the péeces whereof they brought readye framed out of England and hauing prepared it they launched it into the Water wherein the Captaine with fiftéene men entred with the cheefe Boatesman called Ian de Greicke being Maister of the shippe which they had taken in the Hauen of S. Iago wherewith they went to sée if they could finde the two Shippes that they had lost by stormy weather as I saied before and likewise thinking to goe on Land to fill certaine vessels with fresh Water they durst not venture for they sawe people on all side of the shoare so that in the end they returned againe without hearing of the other Shippes being there they tooke all the Ordinaunce out of their Shippe and newe dressed and rigged her which done they put a small péece of Ordinaunce into the Pinnace wherewith they set saile againe following on their course Hauing sayled thirtéene daies they came to an Island lying about the shot of a Base from the Lande where they ankered and there they found foure Indian Fishermen in two Canaos who tolde them that on the Firme Lande they might haue fresh water but they vnderstanding that there was not much and that it was somewhat within the Lande they would not spend any time about it but set sayle againe leauing the Fishermen with their Canaos following on their course along by the shore The next day being somewhat further they espied certaine Indian Fishermen that were vpon the Lande in their houses which the English Captaine perceauing presently entered into the Pinnace and rowed on Land where hee tooke three of the said Fishermen taking with him halfe of the Fish that lay packed vpon the shoare ready to bee laden with the which Indians and booty they came on boord againe The next day following they sawe a Barke laden with Fish that belonged to the Spaniards with foure Indians in it This Barke with the Indians and the Fish they tooke and bound the Spanish Shippe to their sterne and so drewe it after them leauing the said Indians within it who by night vnbound the Barke and secretly made away with Barke and Fish and were no more seene The next day the Captaine went into the Pinnace and because hee sawe certaine houses vppon the shoare hee made thither and beeing on Lande hee found two menne in them whereof one hee tooke leauing the other behinde and there hee found thrée thousand Pesoes of siluer euery Peso being the value of a Ryall of eight and seuen Indian Sheepe Hennes and all whatsoeuer they found wherewith they departed from thence following on their course and two dayes after they came by the hauen called Azijcka where they found two shippes the one laden with goods and Spanish wares out of the which they tooke only two hundred Bottigas or Spanish Pots with Wine and out of the other seuē and thirty Bharas of siluer which are péeces of tenne or twelue pound each Bharre and thinking to leape on shore with two Barkes that they found in the said Hauen with about seuen and thirty Harquebushes bowes they perceiued on the land certaine horsemen comming towards them whervpon they left off their pretence and tooke with them a Moore that they found within the Barkes with whome they retourned aboord The next day in the morning they burnt the shippe that was laden with the Spanish wares and tooke the other with
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
not knowe it but when you see this Island then you may knowe where you are From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles which is a pleasant way and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles which is a verie good a deepe Hauen Between the Islandes aforesaid this Hauen lieth another rouÌ„d Island called Monte de Trigo that is the hill or heape of wheate which is a verie good marke for such as desire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa that is the hauen of Steuen da Costa are fiue miles this is a good Hauen for great shippes it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in and if you will not put into it outwarde close by the land you haue an Island called A Ilha da Moela that is the Island of Chéese where you may anker From this Hauen Southwestward lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada that is the burnt Island which is a flat Island all stonie but along by it it is faire ground like South southeastward From the Hauen lyeth a Cliffe which of many men is not knowne it lyeth aboue the water and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada From thence to the Island called Canaueas that is the Island of Réedes are thrée miles you run North Northeast and South Southwest along by the coast Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water and lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands whereof the one is somewhat long and round and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea where you may put in with small ships From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina are 48. miles and you run along the coast North South This is a long Island full of trées it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands and on the South side another Island called A Galle that is the Island of the Gally on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships it hath much fresh water and great store of fish and wilde Deere This Island lyeth vnder 28. degrees and ½ From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos that is the Hauen of Géese by some called La Laguna that is the Lake This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata there is not one hauen where you may put in the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast Sayling from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. degrees â…” Then you must put to the land when you sée it which at the first sheweth like an Island called los Castillos then you shall run along the coast which will lie Southwestward Southwest and by West and west southwest from you and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria for the land there is so flat that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point but there you shall sée certaine riffes but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it then cast out your Lead and there you shall find 10.14 and 18. fadome déepe therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground and you are in a good way Being there as aforesaid then run as long as you can well discerne the land then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos that is the Island of Wolues for there you sée many wolues it is a flat Island all full of stones on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies This Island is distant from the Firme land about two miles and ½ towards the northwest from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island with a low wood close by the land which hath a good hauen to anker in if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande which is a lowe stony point and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it and if you enter on the Northeast side you néede not feare any thing and to anker kéepe close by the Island for there you haue fresh water and great store of fish vpon the ground Béeing there you must bée carefull for there beginneth the first high Lande and from it about eight or ten myles further lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande being two myles in length you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles you must kéepe harde by the shoare because of the sande aforesaide and from thence with your Leade in your hande with good watch and foresight and if it bee not seasonable weather to saile by night then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day the better to make your voiage And when you thinke you are past this sand then you shal sée a hill called O monte de Santo Seredâ—o which is a rounde high hill the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores that is the Island of Flowers which you may passe about without danger And when you come into the salt or fresh water which floweth fiue and twentie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires that is the Riuer of good aire where the water is verie fresh then hold your course West and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire which is the best course you can holde but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water then saile no further if it bée by night but in the day time you may sée whither you saile which must be in sight of land and so neere that you may easily discerne the trées holding two miles from the land for you can not passe by the Riuer of
good aire without séeing the houses that stand vpon the same The most part of the land of the Riuer of good aire is a thicke land like a downe about thrée miles along by the sea side as soone as you sée this lande then you must make right towards the houses yet somwhat more towards the south side where there is a place where the shippes anker but if you desire to runne on the North side then you shall take your course from the Island las Flores or from Santa Horodio about a mile and a halfe from the land at three and ½ or foure fadome to the Islands of Saint Gabriel which are thrée smal Islands but they haue no good Rode and if you chance to anker there goe not a shore but verie warily because the inhabitants haue warres with the Spaniards and Portingales all along the riuer but the best course is on the South side from the fresh water inwards The 63. Chapter How to saile from the Island La Gomera one of the Islands of Canaria to the Antillas or sore Islandes of the Spanish Indies and from thence to the coast of the Firme land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios as also the course from thence to the Hauana and the channell thereof and so to the Flemiâ—h Islands and from thence to Spaiâ—ne with the scituation of the places SAyling from the Island La Gomera to the Island called La Desseada that is the Desired Island being one of the Islandes of the Spanish Indies then you must holde your course South for the space of a mealetide so to get out of the calme from thence you must runne West Southwest till you be vnder 20. or 22. degrées and beeing there you must runne West and West and by South till you come vnder fifteene degrées and 1 â— which is the height of the Island La Desseada If when you are there you haue a West winde then run Southwest as farre as you thinke good thereby to get againe vnder fifteene degrées and ½ running on the wether side West Northwest to bring all to one point whereby you shall find helpe from North and South East and West because you are close by the lande holding your course West and west and by north because the compasse windeth a strike into the Northwest with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada This Island lieth East and West and sheweth like a Gallie with her tilt vp on the east side it is a low land in forme like a bore-sprit of a shippe or galley from the West side it is high land shewing like the sterne of a gally and on the South side it sheweth like halfe an Island the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe The Island called Maâ—galante is a low and flat land and reacheth East West being full of trées on the East side beeing highest and on the South side hauing certaine white downes on the West side about halfe a mile from the Island it hath a blacke shining cliffe This Island lyeth full vnder fifteene degrees The Island la Dominica is a great Island and reacheth Northwest and southeast when you sée it first beeing on the outside therof it sheweth like 2. Islands by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle but when you are close by it then you perceiue it to be all one Island it is full of hils on the Southeast side a lowe land hauing a small or thin point of land with a houell vpon it on the North-west side it is thicke high Land hauing a Hill that seemeth to bee seperated and to stand alone by it selfe although it is not alone Vpon this hil there is a rock which sheweth like a clock house without the aforesaid thicke high Land there is a Rocke or cliffe which runneth off froÌ„ y e thick point This Island lyeth vnder 15. degrées ½ The Islands called Los Santos are four Islands which are not very high lying in Triangle Betweene these Islands and the Island La Dominica there runneth a good channell to passe through Sayling from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa lying from the Firme Lande you shall holde your course West and West and by South vntill you bee by the point and if you sée it not then runne southwestward towards it or Southward vntill you sée it This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land running into Seaward and within the lande it hath a rowe of Hilles which are called the Oile Hils which stretch along by Veuansuela where they end which vpon the coast of the Firme land From this Point you runne along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela and betwéene these two Points there are two hauens wherof one is called Bahya Honda that is the deepe Bay This lieth on the East side and on both sides where the Sea beateth it hath downes The other Hauen lying on the West side within it hath a high Land or Hill which reacheth North and South In both these Hauens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tunnes All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is cleare and safe The point Cabo de la Vela is a high land like a suger loafe and about half a mile from it there is a cliffe which sheweth like a ship vnder saile and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela that is the point of the saile This Cliffe lieth Northeast and Southwest with y e Point aforesaid it is said you may well passe betwéene it and the lande and if you depart from the saied Point to saile to the Cliffe and Point called Cabo de la aguia that is the Point of the Néedle then you shall runne West South-west by the which course you shall see it They are foure Cliffes together which shewe in forme like a Horse shooe and the Lande that is right against it is a high Land Beeing inward to the Lande some what higher which is called Las Sierras Neuadas that is the Snowe Hils when these hils are Southward from you then you are right against the foure cliffes And comming to the beginning of the foure Cliffes hauing past the Riuer De Palomina lying by the last Cliffe then you shall see the Cabo de La aguia This Cape is a still Lande descending downeward to the Sea side but not very high on the toppe hauing a Dale which sheweth like a saddle It hath likewise on the out side close by it thrée blacke shining Cliffes which the water dooth almost flowe ouer they lye with the Cape aforesaid North and South The saied Cape is bare sheweth blackish and shining All this coast reacheth almost East and West From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward you must runne along by the coast alwaies looking to your course because of the Billowes and streames that come from the Lande which oftentimes fal vpon you When you discouer the land of Charthagena you shall sée two Cliffes
yet somewhat colde therein is found much Mather seruing to die wooll cloath and leather it is also ful of thicke woods fishponds and faire Riuers of fresh water also of ponds that naturally are salt water In the woods are many hogges and oxen the riuers do oftentimes cast foorth gold in this Island are sixe townes inhabited by Spaniards whereof the first principal is Saint Iacobs the residence and sea of the Bishop but Hauana is the cheefe towne of marchandize and where all their Shippes are made Twoo principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island the first that therein is a valley situate betweene two hils in length about two or three Spanish miles wherein nature of it selfe bringeth foorth certaine round balles such as by art cannot possibly bee made rounder and in so great aboundance that they may ballist or loade whole Shippes therewith and are vsed in the shippes in steede of Iron or Leaden bulltes The other is a certaine hil not farre from the sea from whence there floweth pitch in great aboundance and runneth unto the sea where it driueth vppon the shore from place to place as the winde and weather serueth This pitch is vsed by the inhabitants and Spaniards to pitch their shippes The people of the Island are like those of Hispaniola onely differing in speech both men and women go naked and kéepe their bridalles in verie strange manner for that he which is married lieth not the first night with his wife be if it be a Lord he biddeth all the Lordes and one of them doth it for him and if it be a Marchant then Marchants take the paines to helpe him but if it be a countreyman either one of the Lordes or the priest doth ease him of a labour They leaue their wiues for verie smal occasions but the women may not forsake their husbands for any cause whatsoeuer The men are very vnchaste and wicked liuers there are great wormes and snakes in the Island and not venimous but easie to be taken the flesh whereof they eate and are neuer hurt therwith which snakes do liue by eating certaine beastes called Guabiniquinazes whereof many times there are seauen or eight found within their mawes they are in greatnesse like Hares in form like fores onely that their feete are like Conies feete the head like a Wesell a Fores taile long haire like a Badger of colour somwhat red the flesh sauorie and holsome This Islande was verie populous but nowe hath verie few onely certain Spaniards the rest beeing almost cleane rooted out and dead for want of meate Iamaica RIght against Cuba lyeth another Island which stil holdeth the name it alwaies had and is called Iamaica and of the Spaniards saint Iacob it lieth betwéene seuentéene and eightéene degrées on this side the Equinoctiall line on the East side it hath Saint Dominico about fiue and twentie miles distant on the West side the Cape or corner of Iucatana on the north Cubam also fiue and twentie miles distant and somewhat more and on the South another smal Island called Lacerana of fiue and twentie miles distant as the rest This Islande was discouered by Christopherus Columbus in his seconde nauigation into those countreyes and was taken by his son Don Diego gouerning the Island Saint Dominico by one Iohan de Squibel a captaine The breadth of the Islande surpasseth the length for it is from East to West about fiftie miles and from north to south twentie miles it is most inhabited by Spaniards the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them like those of Lucaya The middle of the Island hath the longitude of 191. degrees and latitude or height eighteene degrees and is distant from the line seuenteene degrees on the north side It hath a hill that raiseth it on al sides inward to the middle of the land and so proportionably and euen that it can hardly bee descerned it is verie fruitfull both on the sea side and within the land and in times past verie populous such as were very wittie and subtile more then other of the Islanders thereabouts both in wars and other labours There is likewise gold and verie fine cotten wooll and at this present it is ful of beasts brought thither by the Spaniards and there haue increased The swines flesh is better in that Island then in any other place The cheefe towne in this Island is called Hispalis of Siuilia because of the abby which therein is erected the first abbot being Peter Marti◠borne in Milan an excellent learned man and hee that wrote most concerning this Hystorie Hispaniola or Haiti THe seconde great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by the first inhabitants called Quisqueia or Quisquesia and after that Haiti and then Cipanga Haiti is as much to say as roughnesse or sharpnesse and Quisqueia great land Christopherus Columbus called it Hispaniola and now it is called Saint Dominico after the cheefe Towne in the same Island it was discouered in Anno 1493. on the east side thereof lyeth the Island of Saint Iohn and many others on the West Cuba and Iamaica on the north the Island of the Canibals and on the south the firme land which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela or little Venice The cōpasse of this Island is 350. miles Benzo saith 400. French miles which is in a manner al one and it is broader then long for in length it is from East to west 150. miles and from north to south 40. miles the middle of the Island lyeth in the longitude of 300. degrees in latitude 19 in it there are verie many and great hauens as Hatibanico Iuua Ozoma Neyua Nizao Nigua Hayna and Iaques which do al runne into the sea There are others that are smaller as Macorix Ciba◠Cotui wherof Macorix is verie ful of fish the other two abounding in gold In this Island are two very strange lakes the one because of the goodnes and profitablenes therof the other by reason of the strangenesse the one comming out of the hilles from whence the Riuer Puizao hath her issue it profiteth no man onely it giueth a feare and a little sinder sulkes The other of Xaragua is salt although many sweete riuers runne into it and hath many fishes among the which are verie great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen it is hard by the sea and is eleuen miles in compasse the riuer sides and shores were much inhabted except the Saline a verie faire hauen and the Riuer Iaques where there is a great salt hil There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blew colour and much brasill wood cotten wooll but they know not how to make any thing of it amber rich mines of gold and is also fished out of lakes and riuers and likewise siluer and other mettals great abundance of sugar it is verie fruitful ground Reddish Lettice and Coleworts beeing sowed therein are within sixteene dayes after ripe and to bee eaten Melons
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you